Home

Epson 4056 Printer User Manual

image

Contents

1. Column Totals g1to q 128 RB 3B 24 24 3H 66 129 ABO AE Note n 216 vertical line spacing may be used in graphics printing n 216 in line spacing is approximated using 1 144 in steps Maximum local and cumulative error is 1 216 in REM PRINT AN X SHAPED PATTERN USING 60 DPI DENSITY GRAPHICS LPRINT CHR 1 Az CHR 60 CHR 0 CHR 1 CHR 80 CHR 0 FORI 1TO8 READ D LPRINT CHR D NEXT LPRINT DATA 129 66 36 24 24 36 66 129 176 Universal Control Commands Epson FX 100 Control Commands This section describes the control codes and control commands you can use in Epson FX 100 emulation mode Before using these commands read the section entitled Control Commands An Introduction It describes the typographic conventions used in this section and other information needed to send these commands in the correct format 178 Epson FX 100 Control Commands INDEX OF CONTROL CODES AND COMMANDS Character Sets National Use Character Maps ESC R n 183 Select IBM Character Set 22 or Expand Printable Characters ESC 6 184 Select IBM Character Set 1 or Standard Printable Characters ESC 7 184 Control Codes Printable Characters ESC n 185 Form Length Length of Form in Lines ESC C n 186 Length of Form in Inches ESC C NUL n 187 Graphics Single Density Graphics ESC K n1 n2 d1 d816 188 Double Density Graphics ESC L ESC Y n1 n2 d1 d1632 191 Quad Density Graphics ESC Z
2. ESC 7 Select IBM Character Set 1 ASCII ESC 7 Control CTRL 7 Decimal 27 55 Hexadecimal 1B 37 This command causes the printer to print with the IBM Character Set 1 See Appendix D for charts of character sets ESC All Character Character Set ASCII ESC n1 n2 Control CTRL n1 n2 Decimal 27 92 n1 n2 Hexadecimal 1B 5C n1 n2 Prints a number of characters from an All Character Set then returns to the character set in use prior to receipt of the ESC command n1 and n2 specify the number of succeeding characters to be printed from this set The total number of characters to be printed from an All Character Character Set is equal to n1 n2 x 256 An All Character Character Set is constructed from an IBM Code Page See Appendix D ESC enables you to print continuously from an All Character Character Set ESC is valid for printing one character only Both commands enable printing of characters for data bytes normally recognized as control codes See Appendix D for charts of character sets 228 IBM Proprinter Control Commands An All Character Character Set includes printable characters for data byte values from 0 to 31 and 128 to 159 decimal 00 to 1F hex and 80 to 9F hex No control code functions are performed when ESC Vis in effect Example REM PRINT NEXT 130 CHARACTERS FROM ALL CHARACTERS SET LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 130 CHR 0 ESC Print On
3. 4 Open hinged paper retainers on tractors Paper Specifications Type standard fanfold edge perforated Single part to 6 part paper Sheet Width 3 in to 16 in approx 76 2 mm to 406 4 mm including tractor strips Form Length 0 5 to 31 5 in approx 12 7 to 800 mm in 2 in increments to conform to configuration menu setting Tractor Strips 4 00 0 25 mm dia sprocket holes 1 4 in from outside edge of paper located every 1 2 in vertically Bond Weight 14 Ib to 28 Ib 52 g m to 105 g m for single part paper Variable for multi part paper Thickness 0 002 in to 0 005 in approx 0 065 mm to 0 13 mm for single part paper Total thickness for multi part paper is 0 018 in approx 0 46 mm For more information see Appendix A Other form lengths are available using emulation control commands DEC emulation includes a No Form mode Operators Guide 23 Feed paper from either the bottom or front of the printer as shown in the following illustrations Gently push paper up until it appears between printheads and platen Note Prefer feeding paper stock from the bottom rather than the front Feeding from the bottom is the most direct and trouble free path causing less stress on the paper s sprocket holes during high speed printing If you use multi part paper or label stock you should feed only from the bottom If you feed from the front be sure paper flows freely into
4. 256 257 258 259 260 261 224 IBM Proprinter Control Commands Set Cancel NLQ Set NLQ Cancel NLQ ESC I n ESC G ESCH Emphasized Mode Bold Strike ON ESC E Emphasized Mode Bold Strike OFF ESC F Set Cancel Underline Set Subscript Superscript Cancel Subscript Superscript Tabs Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs Horizontal Tab Vertical Tab Set Multiple Vertical Tabs Set Tabs to Power On Settings ESC n ESC S n ESCT ESC D n1 n32 NUL HT VT ESC B n1 n16 NUL ESC R 262 262 262 262 263 263 264 264 265 266 266 267 267 ALPHABETICAL SUMMARY Command BEL BS CAN CR DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 ESC ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC 6 ESC 7 ESC ESCA ESC B ESC C ESC C NUL ESC D ESC E ESC F Function Bell Backspace Cancel Data in Print Buffer Carriage Return Select Printer Cancel Condensed Pitch Deselect Printer on Serial Port Cancel Enlarged Pitch Set Cancel Underline 1 8 Inch Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Line Spacing Start Text Line Spacing Set by ESC A n 216 Inch Line Spacing Set Top of Form Auto Linefeed Select IBM Character Set 2 Select IBM Character Set 1 Set 12 Pitch n 72 Inch Line Spacing Set Multiple Vertical Tabs Set Length of Form by Line Set Length of Form in Inches Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs Emphasized Mode Bold Strike ON Emphasized Mode Bold Strike OFF Page 239 235 Command ESC G ESC H ESC ESC J ESC K E
5. CSI ESC P n q d1 dx ESC D or IND ESCE NEL ESC K or PLD LF ESC n d ESC n e FF ESC 18w ESC 4w ESC 3w ESC 2w ESC O w or ESC wor ESC 1 w ESC 9w ESC 8w ESC 7 w 302 302 302 303 308 308 308 308 309 309 309 310 310 310 311 311 311 311 311 311 311 311 311 311 Select 6 0 Pitch Select 5 0 Pitch Select Font Pitches Select All Pitches Print Style Draft Quality Printing Near Letter Quality Printing Enable Underline Disable Underline Enable Underline Disable Underline Special Printhead Movement Set Active Column to Column n Backspace Advance n Columns Print Direction Unidirectional Printing Bidirectional Printing Operators Guide 261 ESC 6w ESC 5w ESC 29h ESC 29 ESC zor ESC 1 z ESC 2 z ESC 4m ESC 24m ESC 2m ESC m ESC n BS ESC n a ESC 41h ESC 411 311 311 311 312 312 312 312 313 313 313 313 314 314 314 315 315 DEC LA210 Control Commands Tabs Set Horizontal Tab at Current Column Clear Horizontal Tab at Current Column Set Horizontal Tab at Column n Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs Clear All Horizontal Tabs Horizontal Tab Set Horizontal Tab Vertical Tab Set Set Vertical Tab at Current Line Clear Vertical Tab at Current Line Set Vertical Tab at Line n Set Multiple Vertical Tabs Clear All Vertical Tabs Vertical Tab ESC H or ESC 1 ESC g or
6. Maintenance Manually slide the printhead carriage back and forth If the ribbon feed wheel spins on the left to right pass of the carriage the ribbon cartridge is installed correctly If not remove the cartridge and re install Adjust the printhead gap using the printhead gap adjustment lever If necessary see Adjusting the Printhead Gap Page 27 Operators Guide 97 The Clean Way To Re Attach a Ribbon Guide Lay the ribbon cartridge face down on a table as shown below Make sure the ribbon is taut If not turn the ribbon feed wheel in the direction of the arrow until the ribbon is taut Determine the proper position of the ribbon guide The ribbon guides are labeled Left Middle and Right The guides are physically different and therefore not interchangeable Hold a pencil under the ribbon as shown below and slip on the ribbon guide so that the handle on the ribbon guide is at the top of the cartridge The ribbon should be positioned under the ribbon guide posts Remove the pencil and use it to slip the ribbon under the spurs on the guide Ribbon Guide Post Bottom Of Cartridge Top Of Cartridge The Clean Way To Re Attach a Ribbon Guide 98 Maintenance CHANGING FORMS COMPRESSOR The forms compressor is located between the platen and the printhead carriage as shown in the illustration Its purpose is to hold the paper flat against the platen during printing Forms compressor replacem
7. P8 Control CTRLA A Z M P1 P8 Decimal 1 65 122 77 P1 P8 Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 4D P1 P8 Operators Guide E 5 P1 THROUGH P8 The P1 through P8 bytes are the parameters of the Barcode Format command P1 Barcode Symbology This parameter specifies the type of barcode to print The valid entries for P1 are 0 interleaved 2 of 5 1 PostNet graphics mode 4 Code 39 default value 5 EAN 8 6 9 EAN 13 Codabar a a Start and stop character a 10 Codabar bib Start and stop character b 11 Codabar c c Start and stop character c 12 Codabar did Start and stop character d 13 UPC A 14 UPC E 21 PostNet text mode See Page E 18 for information on Start and Stop Characters Note For best PostNet barcodes prefer text mode P1 21 to graphics mode P121 Also for PostNet P2 through P8 may be any value they must be included in the command but are ignored by the printer E 6 Appendix E Barcodes P2 Barcode Height The height of the barcode is adjustable from 1 12 in to 10 in in 1 12 in increments The valid entries for P2 are 0 or 9 3 4 in default value n n 12 in The valid range of n is 1 to 120 P3 Human Readable Line Characters represented in the barcode symbol may be printed below the symbol in a human readable line The line is centered or if too long left justified below the symbol It is printed in the print style in place prior to the receipt of the Start
8. WARNINGS Hazardous voltages are present in the 4100 printer With the enclosure removed and power applied hazardous voltage areas are present Equipment service must be performed only by service trained personnel who are aware of the hazards involved Double Pole Neutral Fusing The 4100 printer contains two fuses in the power receptable It is possible for only one fuse to blow If this occurs be warned that even though the POWER indicator is not lit some printer electrical circuit may remain active ALWAYS turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before checking the cause of the blown fuse s and before replacing the fuse s Use only the fuses specified Never use repaired fuses and never short circuit a fuse holder 108 Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING Today s computers printers and other electronic equipment are by and large more reliable than those of just a few years ago But still troubles occur If you have trouble vvith your printer expect the best not the vvorst because most times the solution to the problem is quite simple The follovving table outlines most minor and major problems along vvith recommended solutions If you need additional assistance though please call our customer service department they are more than happy to help See the front of this guide for appropriate voice fax numbers and addresses If you call please have your printer model and serial numbers handy these nu
9. e 8 Bit DEC factory default e 7 Bit DEC 8 Bit DEC The U S Multilingual 8 Bit DEC Character Set 8 bit control code map GO amp G2 character maps is shown on Page 43 Instead of the U S or multilingual character map you can select one of 11 others using the character graphics maps 7 Bit DEC The U S 7 Bit DEC Character Set is the left hand half of the 8 bit character set shown on Page 43 Instead of the U S national use character map you can select multilingual or one of 11 others using the character graphics maps Character Maps G0 through G3 Pressing YES to GO G1 G2 or G3 prints out the present national use graphics map selection e Multilingual G2 factory default e Sweden e VT100 Line Draw G1 factory e Italy ANSI default e United States G0 amp G3 factory e Spain default e France e Hebrew e Germany e Finland e United Kingdom e Canada French e Denmark For more information on DEC national use graphic maps see Appendix D Operators Guide 85 Overlay Characters Pressing YES prints out the present settings e None factory default e OCRA e OCRB e Accept User Defined Characters You can alter any active character set by overlaying one or more characters with either a predefined or a customized character map The printer contains two sets of predefined optical character recognition OCR maps If you press YES to either OCR A or OCR B the printer overlays some of the characters
10. 11 Re install the ribbon cartridge Page 100 and paper Page 21 Operators Guide 101 CHANGING FUSES Caution Double pole neutral fusing The printer contains two fuses in a compartment just above the power receptacle near the left rear corner of the printer If a fuse blows turn off power and unplug the power cord Attempt to find the cause of the blown fuse before putting in a new fuse or fuses To change a fuse proceed as follows 1 2 Note the voltage selection in the window of the fuse compartment Use a small flat blade screwdriver to open fuse compartment as shown in the illustration on Page 109 Pull out voltage selection tumbler Pull out fuse holder s Check blown fuse s Note f one or both fuses are shattered this indicates a short circuit in 6 the printer receptacle or in the printer s primary power supply If a fuse is shattered do not attempt to replace the fuse simply unplug the printer and call one of the numbers listed in the front of this operator s guide to obtain qualified servicing Obtain new fuse s e For 100 or 120 Vac use two 3 00 a slow blow fuses 1 in x Va in rated at 250 v e For 220 or 240 Vac use two 1 6 a time delay fuses 5 mm x 20 mm rated at 250 v 102 Maintenance 7 Re insert both fuse holders with proper fuses with the arrows facing right and then re insert voltage selection tumbler Make sure that the same voltage selection no
11. Control cTRL n Decimal 27 33 n Hexadecimal 1B 21 n Specifies the number of characters per inch pitch and degree of boldness strike The entries for n are as follows n Pitch Strike n Pitch Strike 5 18 2 Single 37 9 1 Single 21 18 2 Double 53 9 1 Double 13 18 2 Bold 45 9 1 Bold 29 18 2 Extra Bold 61 9 1 Extra Bold 4 16 67 Single 36 8 33 Single 20 16 67 Double 52 8 33 Double 12 16 67 Bold 44 8 33 Bold 28 16 67 Extra Bold 60 8 33 Extra Bold 1 12 0 Single 33 6 0 Single 17 120 Double 49 6 0 Double 9 12 0 Bold 41 6 0 Bold 25 12 0 Extra Bold 57 6 0 Extra Bold 0 10 0 Single 32 5 0 Single 16 10 0 Double 48 5 0 Double 8 10 0 Bold 40 5 0 Bold 24 10 0 Extra Bold 56 5 0 Extra Bold Note To select 15 0 pitch or 7 5 pitch use the universal control command SOH Az or ESC Azi See the example on the next page 206 X Epson FX 100 Control Commands Example REM SET TO 20 PITCH SINGLE STRIKE LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 5 LPRINT 20 pitch in single strike REM SET TO 5 PITCH EXTRA BOLD STRIKE LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 56 LPRINT 5 pitch in extra bold SI or ESC SI Condensed Pitch ASCII SI Control CTRL O Decimal 15 Hexadecimal OF ASCII ESC Sl Control CTRL CTRLO Decimal 27 15 Hexadecimal 1B OF Increases character pitch according to the table below Increasing character pitch allows more characters to be printed per line ESC SI duplicates the function of the
12. NN Rak NNN D 36 Appendix D Character Sets CHARACTER SUBSTITUTIONS FOR EPSON NATIONAL USE CHARACTER MAP Ex e 2 T TET J J 8 ele lw le Hexadecimal 40 5C 60 7B 7C 7D 7E Hexadecimal as aa eo p pe oD DE ro les re fD Fe Hexadecimal A4 CO DB DC FC United States jt le IL l l France s e e S8 D l jo t f Germany l S JA jo U j fa j l B United Kingdom e le M h l Pt italy ANSI EN Pt e Character substitutions in the upper half of the resulting character set are italics See Page D 18 for the complete Epson U S Character Map Operator s Guide D 37 CHARACTER SUBSTITUTIONS FOR DEC NATIONAL USE CHARACTER MAP Hexadecimal 23 40 88 sc so se eo Ie re vo E Hexadecimal 40 5C 60 7B 7C 7D 7E Heradecimal a3 co be pe bb be ro Fe te r re eoe co DB DC FC Canada French 8 8 1g18 111016 urs Finland 9G 4A France ss dT EF Germany sss HL SULA italy ANS Jelg NonvayiDenmark A Spain CT EL OS OG Swden E United Kingdom United States See Page D 30 for the complete DEC U S Character Map D 38 Appendix D Character Sets THE CHARACTER SET The character set is the result of selecting control code and character code maps For example in the config
13. Scanner Will not Read 1 Barcode Density Too 1 Set density in configuration Barcodes Low menu to 100 dpi Page 91 Re adjust vertical alignment in 2 Vertical Misalignment configuration menu Page 93 During Bi Directional If necessary turn off bi Printing directional printing in configuration menu Page 73 Replace ribbon Page 100 3 Worn Out Ribbon Try double strike printing Page 91 Scanner Will not Read 1 See Scanner Will not Read Barcodes above PostNet Barcodes 2 PostNet Mode text 2 Prefer PostNet text mode versus graphics See Appendix E Italics Epson Emulation Printout is ALL or partly Characters used are from Use data bytes 32 127 for upright Italics and Should not Be the Upper Half of the characters and 160 255 for italic Both Parallel and Serial Character Set characters Interfaces Printout is ALL or partly Operating Systems Such In configuration menu change the Italics and Should not Be as UNIX Routinely Use number of data bits in Serial Characters in Upper Half Options from 8 to 7 bits of Character Set Serial Interface Only Print Positioning Margin Drift Belt Too Loose or Motor Call for service Failure Print Shifts Right or Left Carriage Belt is Slipping Call for service Until Carriage Hits At Belt Clamp Bumper Entire Paragraphs Print No Line Feeds From Host In configuration menu change Out on One Line LF on CR from Off to On Operator
14. Sets the printer to accept data from the computer after it has been deselected by DC3 in the serial mode This code does not place the printer on line if it has been placed off line by pressing ON LINE DC1 is the X ON character See Appendix B for details regarding software handshaking DC3 Deselect Printer on Serial Port ASCII DC3 Control CTRL S Decimal 19 Hexadecimal 13 07 Deselects printer when used with a serial interface Treated as a null on the parallel interface On the serial interface the printer sends this control code to indicate its buffer is full DC3 is the X OFF character See Appendix B for details regarding software handshaking Operators Guide 203 ESC Clear MSB ASCII ESC Control CTRL Decimal 27 61 Hexadecimal 1B 3D Forces the most significant bit MSB of character codes to logic 0 so that characters are printed from the lower half of Epson character sets as non italic characters Overrides the logic of the MSB in data sent from the host ESC is cancelled by ESC ESC gt Set MSB ASCII ESC gt Control CTRL gt Decimal 27 62 Hexadecimal 1B 3E Forces the most significant bit MSB of character codes to logic 1 so that characters are printed from the upper half of Epson character sets as italic characters Overrides the logic of the MSB in data sent from the host ESC gt is cancelled by ESC ESC Cancel MSB Contro
15. d1632 Contro crR L n1 n2 d1 d1632 Decimal 27 76 n1 n2 d1 d1632 Hexadecimal 1B 4C n1 n2 d1 d1632 ASCII ESC Y n1 n2 d1 d1632 Control cTRL Y n1 n2 d1 d1632 Decimal 27 89 n1 n2 d1 d1632 Hexadecimal 1B 59 n1 n2 d1 d1632 Causes the printer to print double density graphics Double density graphics are printed 120 dot columns per horizontal in The following illustrates the difference between single density and double density graphics Single Density ouble Density a TAN KAN ABO AI1 Use ESCLL to print double density graphics at double density speed Use ESC Y to print double density graphics at single density speed ESC Y causes alternate dots to be skipped during printing 192 EpsonFX 100 Control Commands The maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved per line in double density graphics is 1632 Note n 216 vertical line spacing may be used in graphic printing n 216 in line spacing is approximated using 1 144 in steps Maximum local and cumulative error is 1 216 in The operation of double density graphics and quad density is the same as single density For more information refer to the description of the Single Density Graphics command ESC K Example REM PRINT 2 SOLID BARS 150 DOT PATTERNS IN REM LENGTH USING DOUBLE DENSITY GRAPHICS FORI 1TO2 LPRINT CHR 27 L CHR 150 CHR 0 FOR J 1 TO 150 LPRINT C
16. iv Contents IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS DANGER KEEP HAIR HANDS AND CLOTHING AWAY FROM MECHANISM AND AVOID HOT SURFACES VORSICHT HAAR HANDE UND KLEIDUNG VON H DEM MECHANISMUS FERNHALTEN UND HEISSE FLACHEN MEIDEN DANGER N APPROCHER NI LES CHEVEUX NI LES MAINS NI LES VETEMENTS DU MECANISME ET EVITER LES SURFACES CHAUDES PERICOLO TENERE CAPELLI MANI ED INDUMENTI LONTANI DAL MECCANISMO ED EVITARE SUPERFICI CALDE PELIGRO MANTENGA CABELLOS MANOS Y VESTIMENTOS ALEJADOS DEL MECANISMO DE IMPRESION Y EVITE SUPERFICIES CALIENTES Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage points or other risks Servicing must be done by qualified personnel only In the event of product damage liquid spillage or a distinct change in performance requiring service unplug the printer from the wall outlet Always plug the printer power cord into a three wire grounded receptacle Operators Guide v DO NOT operate the printer unless its voltage is set to the local line voltage as described in this manual Keep printer vents free from obstructions Keep the printer dry If water is accidentally spilled on the printer turn the power OFF immediately and wipe it dry Do not turn the power on until the printer is completely dry Do not lean or stack objects on or against the printer If an object is accidentally dropped into the printer turn OFF power and carefully remove the object Use a high qu
17. 169 185 201 21 233 j 234 250 J 170 186 202 218 230 231 h 232 K k 171 187 203 219 235 L 172 188 204 220 M 173 189 205 221 s 2 A 174 190 222 I 236 m 237 n 238 E o 175 191 207 223 239 Operator s Guide u 245 v 246 Ww 247 Xx 248 y 249 251 I I 252 253 254 DEL 255 D 21 D 22 Appendix D Character Sets i VODE PAGE paa U S 6 T s 5 i M 59 e pl 123 za N I f 1 108 T EE E M 09 1 i Mappings of printable characters in Columns 0 and 1 only apply when using IBM 2 control codes Operators Guide D 23 a m omm x 128 144 160 176 192 2 224 mmm E 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 o te e om E 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 s m em w 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246 Pis pur sce we as e 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 140 156 172 188 204 220 141 157 173 189 205 142 158 174 190 2 143 159 ERE Mappings of printable characters in Columns 8 and 9 only apply when using IBM 2 control codes D 24 Appendix D Character Sets IBM 2 CODE PAGE 437 HEBREW 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Mappings of printable characters in Columns 0 and 1 only apply when using IBM 2 control codes Operator s Guide D
18. 288 289 290 290 290 290 290 290 290 290 290 Margins Left Margin Right Margin Left and Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Top and Bottom Margin Set Print Area Miscellaneous Enable Linefeed Newline Disable Linefeed Newline Carriage Return Enable Carriage Return Newline Disable Carriage Return Newline Enable Auto Wraparound Disable Auto Wraparound Form Length No Form Mode Bell Cancel Enable C1 Control Codes Disable C1 Control Codes Define Answer Back Message Return Answer Back Message Device Control String Operators Guide 259 ESC n s or ESC n s ESC n sor ESC n s ESC n1 n2 s ESC n r ESC n r ESC n1 ESC n1 n2 r n2 s ESC 2 h ESC 2 CR ESC 4 h ESC 42 ESC 7h ESC 7 ESC n t ESC Ot BEL CAN ESC SP 7 ESC SP 6 ESC P 1 v h1 h30 ENQ DCS 1 v h1 h30 291 291 291 291 292 293 294 294 295 296 296 296 297 297 297 297 297 298 299 299 299 299 301 301 302 DEC LA210 Control Commands String Terminator Control Sequence Introducer Graphics Graphics Paper Motion Index Linefeed with Carriage Return Next Line Advance Paper 1 12 Inch Linefeed Advance to Line n Advance n Lines Form Feed Pitch Select 18 2 Pitch Select 16 67 Pitch Select 15 0 Pitch Select 12 0 Pitch Select 10 0 Pitch Select 9 1 Pitch Select 8 33 Pitch Select 7 5 Pitch ESC Vor ST
19. 8A Adds a vertical tab at the current line Vertical tabs are set at line numbers not at physical locations on the page VTS is valid only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7 Changing horizontal character pitch also changes the physical position of tab stops These commands only set or clear the tabs The Horizontal Tab control code HT causes the active column to advance to subsequent tab positions Selecting or cancelling font pitches changing the print quality to draft or NLQ or changing the print area also changes the physical position of the tabs Operators Guide 307 ESC J or ESC 3 Set Vertical Tab at Current Line9 ASCII ESC J Control CTRL J Decimal 27 74 Hexadecimal 1B 4A ASCII ESC 3 Control CTRL 3 Decimal 27 51 Hexadecimal 1B 33 Adds a vertical tab at the current line Vertical tabs are set at line numbers not physical locations on the page Both control commands perform the same function ESC 1g Clear Vertical Tab at Current Line ASCII ESC 1 g Control CTRL 1 g Decimal 27 91 49 103 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 31 67 Clears the vertical tab at the current line Vertical tabs at other lines are unaffected ESC n v Set Vertical Tab at Line n ASCII ESC n V Control cTRLI I n v Decimal 27 91 n 118 Hexadecimal 1
20. ESC Gg ESC n u 316 316 316 316 317 ESC n1 n2 n16 u ESC 2 or ESC 2gor ESC 3g HTS HT VTS ESC J or ESC 3 ESC 1g ESC n v 317 317 317 317 318 318 318 319 319 319 319 ESC n1 n2 n15 v ESC 4 or ESC 4g VT 320 320 320 320 ALPHABETICAL SUMMARY Command BEL BS CAN CR CSI DCS 1v ENQ ESC SP 6 ESC SP 7 ESC n ESC n ESC n ESC n ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 ESC 4 ESC D ESCE ESC 2g ESC 2m ESC 2w ESC 2z ESC 2 h Esc 2 ESC 24m Function Bell Backspace Cancel Carriage Return Control Sequence Introducer Device Control String h1 h30 Return Answer Back Message Disable C1 Control Codes Enable C1 Control Codes Select GO Select G1 Select G2 Select G3 Set Horizontal Tab at Current Column Clear All Horizontal Tabs Set Vertical Tab at Current Line Clear All Vertical Tabs Index Linefeed with Carriage Return Clear All Horizontal Tabs Enable Underline Select 12 0 Pitch Set 8 Lines Per Inch Enable Linefeed Newline Disable Linefeed Newline Disable Underline Page 299 314 299 296 302 302 301 299 299 284 285 285 285 316 317 319 320 308 308 317 313 311 280 296 296 313 Operators Guide 263 Command Function Page ESC H Set Horizontal Tab at Current Column 316 ESC J Set Vertical Tab at Current Line 319 ESC K Advance Paper 1
21. If n2 is 0 the current right margin is used n1 must be at least one character position less than n2 n2 must be 255 or less If 255 is specified for the right margin the maximum right margin is set Use a CR immediately after ESC X to establish the printhead position relative to the new margin settings 238 IBM Proprinter Control Commands ESCN Skip Over Perforation ASCII ESC N n Control cTRL N n Decimal 27 78 n Hexadecimal 1B 4E n Sets the bottom margin to n number of lines n must be from 1 to 255 When the form length is changed by using the Length of Form by Lines command ESC C or the Length of Form in Inches Command ESC C NUL the bottom margin setting is cancelled To regain the bottom margin setting use ESC N following either ESC C or ESC C NUL Example REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 55 LINES AND RESET REM BOTTOM MARGIN TO 3 LINES LPRINT CHR 27 C CHR 55 LPRINT CHR 27 N CHR 3 ESCO Cancel Skip Over Perforation ASCII ESC O Control cTRL O Decimal 27 79 Hexadecimal 1B 4F Cancels the bottom margin setting set with ESC N Operators Guide 239 MISCELLANEOUS CR Carriage Return ASCII CR Control CTRL M Decimal 13 Hexadecimal OD Prints any data stored in the print buffer and sets the current column position to the left margin If Auto Linefeed LF on CR is enabled or if ESC 5 is sent before CR a linefeed is performed after th
22. The printer prints out HELP OPTIONS 2 Respond by pressing NEXT The printer prints out INTERFACE OPTIONS 34 Operations Again press NEXT 4 Continue pressing NEXT until the printer prints EMULATION Then press YES The printer prints out Epson FX 100 2 If you intend to change emulations press NEXT The printer prints out change to IBM Proprinter XL 2 Press YES to select this emulation or NEXT to move on to change to DEC LA210 Pressing YES to a selection records that selection Press ON LINE twice to exit the menu and to place printer on line The printer is now in the newly selected emulation and subsequently powers up in that emulation Operators Guide 35 PRINTING THE ACTIVE CHARACTER SET The configuration menu provides a way to print out the active character set For this feature the active character set is defined as the menu selected default character set along with any active overlays OCR A OCR B download characters Character sets selected by software applications such as word processing software cannot be printed using this help feature Note The printout can be in either draft quality or NLQ mode and in either normal or italic style depending on the present print quality and italics settings To print out a copy of the active character set use a power up or on line hot key to enter the configuration menu 1 Either press FORM FEED and then turn on the
23. The two types of equipment are distinguished by their signals and pin assignments as shown in the table on the following page e DTE devices transmit on Pin 2 e DCE devices transmit on Pin 3 Computers and serial printers are usually DTE devices Modems and communication controllers are usually DCE devices The RS 232 C standard specifies more signals than are used or needed in most data communication applications However for reference the table on the following page lists all communication signals their B 2 Appendix B Serial Interface abbreviations and pin assignments The direction of the arrow indicates whether the signal is an input or output of the device Pin assignments are specified for 25 pin D type connectors The RS 232 C standard does not specify pin assignments for serial communication on 9 pin connectors Only nine of the 25 RS 232 C signals are commonly used in serial connections These nine are listed in the table on Page B 4 Serial Port Connector JBO BL RS 422 A serial interface is optional RS 422 A serial connectivity involves differential drivers and receivers for extended computer to printer distances depending on the baud RS 422 A signals are not implemented on the standard printer Operator s Guide B 3 DTE Device DCE Device Signal Abbreviation Frame Ground FG Transmitted Data TxD Received Data RxD Request To Send RTS Clear To Send CTS Data Set Ready DSR Signal Ground SG
24. Using BASIC to Send Commands sssss 142 Using Batch Files to Send Commands 142 Sending Commands From The DOS Command Line 144 Using Control Key Sequences To Send Commands 144 Typographic Conventions ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeaeees 146 KONAN 146 Param ler 5 55 9 din hi da h dh 147 Data Byte Values of Command Parameters 148 Zeros and ONOS eeeh ean eta herein tarehe taie eaei eiaa te icanon tereke 148 Operators Guide xv Universal Control Commands Index of Universal Control Sequences uuuussss 150 Alphabetical Summary of Universal Control Sequences 151 Goni Pent bc bo Eh saan ean carr ie ind ion A Dd 152 Emulation Mode scc treno eR NH Ud UR aM 153 Miscellaneous aaa nenes ee vese nenen eee eee ee eee enen eee 154 Kl PEU 155 Barcodes sit PEE 157 Mapping Characters oe ne d need nene ere e easi onmi enm iE 158 Download GharaCte 1 Sa auaaaaaaaaaa aaa aaa enes eseve vene eee eee ee eee 165 Designing Download Characters esssssssss 166 Extended Characters s eoo indem rero e ect eer 168 Print S I c de DR MR RUE D dE 169 Storing Download Characters aaa 172 Printing Download Characters sssseessssssss 173 Example T cats cates tte ees aT A T bet Auf 178 ERIM el ee i M E LE UE eee 179 KAMPE Co aa eo PC Cl PPO ie ce HPENE 181
25. and Guard Bars E 19 Summary of Required Barcode Data E 19 End Barcode Command sene E 20 Pics c E 21 Example e eh E 21 E E eae nen a Pt Pe N E 22 Alternate COMMAS adore oe asses oc dece tecoce ou der outre E 23 P4 Through P8 Integrity eecceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees E 25 Glossary Index xxii Contents Basics BASIC PHYSICAL FEATURES Acoustic Hood Switch Panel 1 See Operator Access Page 3 2 See Switch Panel Page 6 The Printer Front View Shown With Acoustic Hood JBO AB1 2 Basics 1 Interface Connectors Pover Receptacle Power On Off Switch 1 See Interface Connectors Page 16 2 See Power Receptacle Page 15 The Printer Rear View Shown Without Acoustic Hood JBo Ac1 Operator s Guide Pull Tractor Printhead Gap Adjustment Lever Ribbon Cartridge 7 E Printhead Carriage 3 Use in adjusting printhead gap when loading paper See LoadingPaper and or Adjusting the Printhead Gap Pages 21 and 27 See Changing Ribbon Cartridge Page 99 Operator Access JBO AD2 4 Basics BASIC STARTUP AND PRINTING A Check Paper Supply If necessary load paper See Loading Paper Page 21 Close Operator Access Door Turn on printer Press the side of the power on off switch Page 6 Check Top of Form Setting Normally set the horizontal
26. and high when it is busy processing data This is directly opposite of DTR Operator s Guide B 17 Since DTR and BUSY are logical opposites you can change the polarity of DTR in the configuration menu Under Interface Options Serial Options change DTR Polarity from High factory default to Low IF YOU CANNOT MAKE IT WORK If your printer to computer serial interface is not working try the following e Check your computer manual s explanation of its RS 232 C serial interface and compare that to the printer s requirements e Make sure the serial interface cable is wired properly for data transfer on Pins 2 and 3 and that the control signals are properly matched for handshaking This may require using a serial interface break out box An intelligent serial interface cable like a breakout box is designed to make these checks for you and electronically route the necessary signals to the proper pins l Q Technology s Smart Cable is one of these e Use well shielded and grounded cables e Obtain support from your dealer Check the troubleshooting chart in this operator s guide under Communications for additional assistance B 18 Appendix B Serial Interface If the printer does not respond at all to the host e Make sure that you have selected Serial under Active Interface in the configuration menu Also do not forget that the printer s Serial Options protocol baud parity and so on must match
27. default character set for the currently selected emulation Character source and library selections are stored until power off printer reset or until changed using this command control sequence SOH Az amp or the Overlay Characters option in the configuration menu SOHAzB Map Characters ASCII SOH A Zz B n1 n2 C1g C1p CXa CXp Control CTRLA A Z B n1 n2 c1 a c1 b CXg CXp Decimal 1 65 122 66 n1 n2 c1 aX ci b CXg CXp Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 42 n1 n2 c14 C1p CX3 CXp This controls the relationship between data byte values and their associated printable characters Any printable character from the current character source and character library may be mapped to any data byte value between 0 and 255 enabling you to create custom character maps n1 and n2 define the range of data byte values to which the characters are mapped To map a single character enter the same data byte value for both n1 and n2 The number of each character to be mapped to the range of data byte values is specified using two bytes ca is the least significant byte of the character number cp is the most significant byte of the character number ca and cp must be specified for each character in the range n1 through n2 This control command only maps characters from the currently selected character source and character library Character source and character library are selected with command SOH Az Download c
28. n1 n2 d1 d3264 193 Graphics Mode Selection ESC m n1 n2 d1 dx 194 Line Spacing 7 72 inch ESC 1 195 1 8 inch ESC 195 1 6 inch ESC 2 195 n 72 inch ESC A n 195 n 216 inch ESC 3 n ESC J n 196 Margins Set Left Margin Set Right Margin Skip Over Perforation Sets Bottom Margin Cancel Skip Over Perforation Miscellaneous Printer Initialization Carriage Return Bell Backspace Linefeed Form Feed Delete Last Character Cancel Data in Print Buffer Half Speed Printing Select Printer Deselect Printer Clear MSB Set MSB Cancel MSB Control Print Direction One Line Unidirectional Printing Unidirectional or Bidirectional ESC n ESC Q n ESC N n ESCO ESC CR BEL BS LF FF DEL CAN ESC s n DC1 DC3 ESC ESC gt ESC ESC ESC U n Operators Guide 179 197 197 198 198 199 199 199 200 200 200 201 201 201 202 202 203 203 203 204 204 Epson FX 100 Control Commands Print Style Set Pitch and Strike Condensed Pitch Cancel Condensed Pitch Select Elite Pitch Cancel Elite Pitch Enlarged Pitch Cancel Enlarged Pitch Set Cancel Enlarged Pitch Set Cancel NLQ Double Strike Cancel Double Strike Emphasized Mode Bold Strike ON Emphasized Mode Bold Strike OFF Set Cancel Underline Set Subscript Superscript Cancel Subscript Superscript Set Italics Cancel Italics Tabs Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs Horizontal Tab Vert
29. or is the format print mode spacing etc wrong If so see Communications Page 129 Does the problem manifest itself as a paper problem or a print positioning problem For paper problems jams positioning PAPER indicator see Paper Problems Page 124 For a print positioning problem not printing in the right place see Print Positioning Page 123 and Communications Page 129 12 Have you attempted a self test printout 110 Troubleshooting To do so press and hold LINE FEED while turning on the printer If the print is smudged faded broken and the like see Print Quality Page 120 If the printhead carriage moves too slowly or makes noise see Printhead Performance Page 130 To stop the printout press ON LINE 13 Have you attempted to print a status page To do so press and hold FORM FEED while turning on the printer The printer prints the question HELP OPTIONS Press YES The printer then prints Status Print Again press YES Check printout for incorrect settings Operators Guide 111 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART Four Second Paper Out Install paper Page 21 BEEEEEEEEP With Left Tractor Too Far to 2 Move the left tractor to the far left so that paper covers the paper out sensor PAPER OUT Lit Right Bad Paper Out Sensor 3 Call for service Beep BEEP Beep Paper Jam Clear jam BEEP Beep BEEP Three High Low Beeps With PAPER OUT Flashing Endless BEEP
30. serial interface A 10 throughput A 2 Characters Inch 75 Cleaning 97 exterior surfaces 98 interior surfaces 97 Code Page Epson standard D 50 IBM Hebrew 437 D 25 IBM multilingual 850 D 28 IBM Portugal 860 D 31 IBM U S 437 D 23 Combination keys 10 on line hot keys 12 power up hot keys 10 Communication problems 129 Configuration 49 entering 51 hot keys 11 12 leaving 53 map 56 menu 51 navigating 52 Control code maps DEC menu selection 88 Control code maps DEC 7 Bit DEC D 14 8 Bit DEC D 15 Control code maps Epson menu selection 84 Control code maps Epson Epson D 12 IBM 1 D 13 IBM 2 D 13 Control code maps IBM menu selection 86 Control code maps IBM IBM 1 D 13 2 Index IBM 2 D 13 Controls 6 CR on LF 79 Data bits 68 Data byte map 61 DCE interface B 1 DEC character options 88 DEC LA210 emulation index 272 Decimal to hexadecimal conversion 45 Default factory default reset 92 factory settings 56 Density barcode 91 Double strike barcode 91 Download overlay 90 Draft quality mode 32 DTE interface B 1 DTR B 5 Emulation 33 81 changing 34 DEC LA210 271 Environmental requriements A 13 Epson character sets 82 83 Epson FX 100 emulation index for 190 ETX ACK 65 Factory settings resetting to 92 Form feed control key 10 Form length 77 Forms compressor changing 104 Forms options 76 Fuses changing 107 Handshaking
31. usually described If no documentation is available a break out box or an intelligent serial interface cable can determine which pins are used l Q Technology s Smart Cable for example is an intelligent serial interface cable As pin assignments are determined pin numbers should be written down on the appropriate wiring diagram on Page B 10 When you have written down all required pin assignments you can then build the cable directly from the wiring chart Keep in mind that the actual pin number assigned to any signal may vary from device to device For example Pin 5 is the pin assigned to Signal Ground on the IBM PC AT or later while Pin 7 is the pin assigned to Signal Ground on the IBM PC Operators Guide B 11 CONNECTION EXAMPLES Use the following examples as guides in building a serial interface cable The following examples are presented e IBM PC to Printer e IBM PC AT to Printer IBM PC TO PRINTER The wiring diagram on the following page shows how to connect an IBM PC a DTE device to the printer also a DTE device A DTE DTE interface must make each side of the link seem as if it is receiving inputs from a DCE device This is accomplished by making a cross connected cable First the Signal Ground on the printer is tied to the Signal Ground on the IBM PC likewise the Frame Grounds on the printer and IBM PC are tied together Next RxD on the printer Pin 3 is tied to TxD Pin 2 on the IBM PC then TxD
32. 0 8 57 6 0 8 33 6 0 7 5 6 0 IBM Proprinter Control Commands ESCI Set Cancel NLQ ASCII ESC I n Control cTRL n Decimal 27 73 n Hexadecimal 1B 49 n Sets and cancels near letter quality NLQ print n specifies whether NLQ printing is set or cancelled as follows e n 1or4 Cancel NLQ e n 20r6 SetNLQ Note Near letter quality printing is available only in 10 12 and 15 pitch ESC G Set NLQ ASCII ESC G Control cTRL G Decimal 27 71 Hexadecimal 1B 47 Starts near letter quality NLQ printing Note Near letter quality printing is available only in 10 12 and 15 pitch ESC H Cancel NLQ ASCII ESC H Control cTRL H Decimal 27 72 Hexadecimal 1B 48 Cancels near letter quality NLQ printing set with ESC G ESC E Emphasized Mode Bold Strike ON ASCII ESC E Control cTAL E Decimal 27 69 Hexadecimal 1B 45 Begins emphasized printing All characters following this command are printed in bold strike See BASIC example under ESC F Operators Guide 251 ESCF Emphasized Mode Bold Strike OFF ASCII ESC F Control CTRL F Decimal 27 70 Hexadecimal 1B 46 Cancels emphasized printing bold strike set with ESC E ESC n ESC Az n or SOH Az n Example REM PRINT IN BOLD STRIKE LPRINT CHR 27 E LPRINT Now printing in bold strike REM CANCEL BOLD STRIKE LPRINT CHR 27 F LPRINT Now pr
33. 1 108 T id e 1 P Mappings of printable characters in Columns 0 and 1 only apply when using IBM 2 control codes Operator s Guide D 29 128 144 160 176 192 2 224 o 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 l 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 ml 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 a i 2 2 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 n z vle 140 156 172 188 204 220 141 157 173 189 205 Pt 142 158 174 2 143 159 175 207 Mappings of printable characters in Columns 8 and 9 only apply when using IBM 2 control codes D 30 Appendix D Character Sets DEC NATIONAL USE CHARACTER MAP 0 8 1 9 2 A 3 B 4 C 5 D 6 E 7 F 0 SP p 32 160 48 176 64 192 80 208 96 224 112 240 S o i j 1 1 q 33 161 49 177 65 193 81 209 97 225 113 241 0 P A a 2 2 B R b r 34 162 50 178 66 194 82 210 98 226 114 242 3 C c s 51 179 67 195 83 211 99 227 115 243 e 1 Co Ss uo eme sate 36 164 52 180 68 196 84 212 100 228 116 244 i PORK E Laro e 37 165 53 181 69 197 85 213 101 229 117 245 S 38 166 54 182 70 198 86 214 102 230 118 246 39 167 55 183 71 199 87 215 103 231 119 247 40 168 56 184 72 200 88 216 104 232 120 248 j rue raem sozir vesa iie 41 169 57 185 73 201 89 217 105 233 121 249 421170 5
34. 1 50 1440 13 09 94 20 00 1 30 1250 13 05 83 9 00 1 12 1080 13 09 74 0 00 1 02 960 13 09 DEC LA210 Control Commands DEC LA210 Emulation Graphics Densities assuming any pitch except 12 0 or 6 0 pitch set prior to beginning graphics Aspect Dots inch Overlap ratio Dots line _Inches line 240 64 29 3 36 3168 13 2 240 64 29 3 36 3168 13 2 150 52 38 2 08 1980 13 2 120 40 48 1 67 1584 13 2 100 28 57 1 39 1320 13 2 100 28 57 1 39 1320 13 2 75 04 76 1 04 990 13 2 75 04 76 1 04 990 13 2 DEC LA210 Emulation Printer Graphics Densities assuming 12 0 or 6 0 pitch set prior to beginning graphics Aspect Dots inch Overlap ratio Dots Line Inches Line 240 64 2996 3 36 3168 13 2 240 64 2996 3 36 3168 13 2 180 52 3896 2 08 2376 13 2 180 40 4896 1 67 2376 13 2 120 28 5796 1 39 1584 13 2 120 28 5796 1 39 1584 13 2 90 04 7696 1 04 1188 13 2 90 04 76 1 04 1188 13 2 Operators Guide 269 CHARACTER MAPS The control commands on the next several pages enable you to pre select four different character maps then map them into the lower or upper data bytes when you are ready to use them These commands are valid only while the printer is in DEC LA210 emulation A DEC character map is an assignment of printable characters to some data bytes between 0 and 255 It contains printable characters only and does not contain control codes The lower data bytes are 33 through 126 decimal 21 through 7E hexadecimal The upper data byte
35. 10 11 12 PostNet 0123456789 0123456789 Commas can be used to terminate these barcodes Spaces and hyphens are ignored in printing PostNet barcodes E 12 Appendix E Barcodes ENTERING BARCODE DATA Barcode symbols are printed one line at a time A line may contain one or many symbols To print a line containing a single barcode symbol enter a sequence of characters terminated by a carriage return For example 1987 CR To print a line containing multiple symbols enter multiple sequences of valid characters separated by commas spaces or horizontal tabs depending on the barcode Terminate each line with a carriage return For example 1985 1986 1987 1988 lt CR gt If a single symbol is too long to fit on a single line the printer prints a pattern of all bars an invalid symbol For lines with multiple symbols each symbol that fits in its entirety is printed correctly and the remainder are printed using a pattern of all bars or discarded as space allows Operators Guide E 13 QUIET ZONE Except for PostNet barcodes there is blank space preceding and following each barcode symbol called a quiet zone The width of a quiet zone is 10 times the width of the narrow bar width depending on the barcode Narrow bars are at least 0 014 in wide Therefore each quiet zone is at least 0 14 in wide SPACES Space can be added between barcodes on the same line Each space adds 0 10 in for each space c
36. 12 Inch 309 ESC N n Print Next Character from G2 286 ESC O n Print Next Character from G3 289 ESCP1v Define Answer Back h1 h30 Message 301 ESC P n q d1 dx Graphics 303 ESC z Draft Quality Printing 312 ESC n s Right Margin 291 ESC g Clear Horizontal Tab at Current Column 316 ESC m Disable Underline 313 ESC t No Form Mode 298 ESC w Select 10 Pitch 311 ESC Oz Set 6 Lines Per Inch 311 ESC 1 z Draft Quality Printing 312 ESC 18w Select 18 2 Pitch 311 ESC 19g Clear Vertical Tab at Current Line 319 ESC 1w Select 10 Pitch 311 ESC 12z Set 6 Lines Per Inch 290 ESC 2 z Near Letter Quality 312 ESC nr Bottom Margin 294 ESC n1 n2 r Top and Bottom Margin 292 ESC n s Right Margin 291 ESC n1 n2 s Left and Right Margin 292 ESC n1 n2 n16 u Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs 317 ESC n1 n2 n15 v Set Multiple Vertical Tabs 320 ESC 29h Select Font Pitches 311 Esc 29 Select All Pitches 312 ESC 4 h Enable Carriage Return Newline 297 264 DECLA210 Control Commands Command Function Page ESC 3g Clear All Horizontal Tabs 317 ESC 3w Select 15 0 Pitch 311 ESC 3z Set 12 Lines Per Inch 270 ESC 4g Clear All Vertical Tabs 320 ESC 4m Enable Underline 313 ESC 4w Select 16 67 Pitch 311 ESC 4z Set 2 Lines Per Inch 270 ESC 5w Select 5 0 Pitch 311 ESC 5z Set 3 Lines Per Inch 270 ESC 6w Select 6 0 Pitch 311 ESC 6z Set 4 Lines Per Inch 270 ESC 7w Select 7 5 Pitch 3
37. 201 89 217 105 233 121 249 42 170 58 186 74 202 90 218 106 234 122 250 43 171 59 187 75 203 91 219 107 235 123 251 44 172 60 188 76 204 92 220 108 236 124 252 45 173 61 189 77 205 93 221 109 237 125 253 461174 621190 781206 941222 1101238 1261254 e 47 175 63 191 79 207 95 223 111 239 127 255 Operator s Guide DEC VT100 LINE DRAW CHARACTER MAP 0 8 149 x Ee eic S SE 7 F 34 162 50 178 66 194 82 210 98 226 114 242 35 163 51 179 67 195 83 211 99 227 115 243 36 164 52 180 68 196 84 212 100 228 116 244 37 165 53 181 69 197 85 213 101 229 117 245 38 166 54 182 70 198 86 214 102 230 118 246 39 167 55 183 71 199 87 215 103 231 119 247 40 168 56 184 72 200 88 216 104 232 120 248 41 169 57 185 73 201 89 217 105 233 121 249 42 170 58 186 74 202 90 218 106 234 122 250 43 171 59 187 75 203 91 219 107 235 123 251 44 172 60 188 76 204 92 220 108 236 124 252 45 173 61 189 77 205 93 221 109 237 125 253 46 174 62 190 78 206 94 222 110 238 126 254 f po pon pn Pon 47475 63 191 79 207 95 223 111 239 127 255 D 33 D 34 Appendix D Character Sets OCR A OVERLAY CHARACTER MAP IAN jj t D pn i Sa mM iz ee j Hts E HM m As KEES E AEREE Y Y E He am BERI H mec mul U ala z s m U PAREI P EM o RSS Operator s Guide D 35 OCR B OVERLAY CHARACTER MAP SST ESE ip s s _ kb s Ep H s E e MEU s o d O E 4 s mop sl s EES K Emi m ri m pee pem dem IN
38. 25 i B Fo k 6 u E 6 A s 6 N a u e A n 3 i F 4 i F 3 2 Vo E 7 Va T 172 204 220 ele 157 173 189 205 Pt 158 174 2 i f 1 Mappings of printable characters in Columns 8 and 9 only apply when using IBM 2 control codes D 26 Appendix D Character Sets IBM CODE PAGE 850 MULTILINGUAL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Mappings of printable characters in Columns 0 and 1 only apply when using IBM 2 control codes Operator s Guide D 27 fe 2 12 145 161 177 193 209 Fo E O E 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244 AE 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245 A a u 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247 y O I p U a 3 E 138 170 202 234 250 i Vo U 139 171 203 235 251 140 156 172 188 204 22 E 141 157 178 189 205 221 142 158 174 190 2 222 f 3 n Mappings of printable characters in Columns 8 and 9 only apply when using IBM 2 control codes D 28 Appendix D Character Sets BM VODE RAGE dar Onn eee 32 48 64 112 Lo L Lo fala lte fe la 34 50 66 82 98 114 ps fe fats tals m 35 51 6 8 115 S ofa Pe e e m n 36 52 6 100 116 RESET AS SE Se KEE 21 37 53 85 101 117 s ofa e Po fe m fatale te amp i 39 55 71 87 103 119 8 H X h x 40 56 72 88 104 120 9 l Y i Y 41 57 105 EM SESS lt L V l i
39. Auto Wraparound ASCII ESC 7 Control crR I 7 Decimal 27 91 63 55 108 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3F 37 6C Turns off Auto Wraparound mode set with control sequence ESC 7 h any characters received that would place the active column past the right margin are not printed The printhead remains at the right margin position until a line terminator is received ESC n t Form Length 286 DEC LA210 Control Commands ASCII ESC n t Control CTRL n t Decimal 27 91 n 116 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 74 Sets the length of the form to n lines not physical units Changing the vertical pitch lines per in alters the physical form length The maximum value of n is determined by the current vertical lines per inch setting as follows e 6lines perin n 132 max e 8lines perin n 176 max Changing form length clears the vertical margins and defines the current line as Line 1 If the value of n is 0 the printer enters No Form mode Refer to the following command ESC Ot No Form Mode ASCII ESC t Control crR I t Decimal 27 91 48 116 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 30 74 Causes the printer to enter No Form mode In this mode there are no vertical margins or form length Printing is continuous and line spacing is determined by the current pitch This command overrides the form length setting selected from the configuration menu No Form mode remains in ef
40. BEEP Long Intermittent String of Check printer s Set Serial BEEP BEEP BEEP etc Bad Serial Data Options in configuration menu against those of host Check data from host using hex dump mode Page 132 Call for service 1 Short followed by Recoverable Memory Error If problem persists call for 4 Short Long Beeps service SSSSS ROM Checksum Error SSSSL EEPROM Error SSSLS Bad ROM 5 Long Beeps LLLLL Nonrecoverable Error Press ON LINE to solicit specific beep patterns if any Record beep pattern see list that follows Cycle printer off on to reset Turn off printer to stop beeping 112 RK Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONTINUED BEEPs continued 1 Long followed by Nonrecoverable Errors Record beep pattern Press 4 Short Long ON LINE to solicit still other Beeps Printhead 1 Error patterns if any LSSSS Printhead 2 Error Turn off and then turn on LSSSL Printhead 3 Error printer to reset If problem LSSLS Carriage Motor Overcurrent persists record beep LSSLL Carriage Motor Driven pattern s and call for service LSLSS Overtemperature HV Error LSLSL 24 vdc Error LSLLS 12 vdc Error LSLLL Tachometer Overrun Error LLSSS Linefeed Motor Overcurrent LLSSL Tachometer Timeout Error LLSLS Processor Error LLSLL Synthesis Counter Overrun LLLSL Messages Printed ROM ERROR Bad Checksum Press ON LINE If problem persists call for service NONVOLATILE New Checksum Does no
41. Barcode command Note Enlarged text is not used for the human readable line If the printer is set for enlarged text 5 6 7 5 8 57 or 9 1 pitch the human readable line is printed in the corresponding regular pitch 10 12 15 17 14 or 18 2 pitch respectively The valid entries for P3 are 0 Do not print human readable line 1 Print human readable line default value Note Parameters P4 through P8 discussed on the following pages should be specified only by users familiar with barcode symbol descriptions These parameters set the width of bars and spaces in the barcode symbol Improper adjustment may make the symbols unreadable The default values for these parameters produce barcodes of maximum density If you do adjust these parameters they must be adjusted as a Operators Guide E 7 group to ensure barcode symbol integrity For all UPC and EAN barcodes we recommend these parameters be used without change Adjusting them is likely to make the symbols unreadable All measurements shown are approximate The actual sizes of printed elements and the readability of the resulting symbols are affected by many factors including ribbon wear paper type and head gap adjustment P4 Narrow Bar Width This parameter specifies the width of the narrow bars in a barcode symbol The valid entries for P4 are 0 or 1 0 014 in default value 2 0 027 in n 0 014 0 0133 n 1 for n 0 P5 Wide Bar Width T
42. C 1 handshaking C 2 pin outs for printer C 4 synchronization C 2 timing C 7 Parity 69 Physical features 1 Physical specifications A 12 Platen 100 PostNet 16 Power cord connection 15 indicator 8 on off switch 6 receptacle 15 requirements A 13 Switch 6 voltage selection 15 107 Power up hot keys 10 Print drivers 33 Print position problems 123 Print quality 5 32 problems 122 Print style 72 Printhead carriage 3 Printhead gap adjusting 27 Printhead lever 3 28 100 adjusting 27 Printing 4 character set 37 59 data byte map 61 menu 58 non defaults 58 options 59 status 58 Printing mechanism characteristics A 2 protocol 65 Reliability A 12 Requirements A 13 environmental A 13 interface A 13 labels A 19 paper A 14 Reset to factory defaults 92 Ribbon cartridge 3 changing 99 specifications A 6 Ribbon feed wheel 99 Ribbon guide 99 attaching 103 Robust 67 ROM ERROR 120 RS 232 C B 1 pin assignments for B 3 Safety features A 11 Self test 29 power up hot key 10 29 Sensitivity 93 Serial interface basics B 1 connecting cable B 16 connection examples B 12 connector B 16 hardware handshaking B 17 making a cable B 9 menu selection 63 pin outs for printer B 7 software handshaking B 15 troubleshooting 129 B 18 Serial options 64 Service vi Single strike barcode 91 Skip perforation 78 Slash zero 76 Specification 23 Specifications A 2
43. CHR 27 P2q QKKQ CHR 27 v pin fire data offset data byte decimal data byte ASCII 296 DECLA210 Control Commands PAPER MOTION ESC D or IND Index ASCII ESC D Control CTRL D Decimal 27 68 Hexadecimal 1B 44 ASCII IND Control not applicable Decimal 132 Hexadecimal 84 Advances the active line by one line When the active line is advanced past the bottom margin the active line is set to the top margin IND does not change the active column Both commands perform the same function IND is valid only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7 ESC E or NEL Linefeed with Carriage Return Next Line ASCII ESC E Control CTRL E Decimal 27 69 Hexadecimal 1B 45 ASCII NEL Control not applicable Decimal 133 Hexadecimal 85 Advances the active line by one line and returns the active column to the left margin Both commands perform the same function NEL is valid only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7 Operators Guide 297 ESC K or PLD Advance Paper 1 12 Inch ASCII ESC K Control CTRL K Decimal 27 75 Hexadecimal 1B 4B ASCII PLD Control not applicable Decimal 139 Hexadecimal 8B Performs a 1 12 in paper feed Line
44. Data Carrier Detect DCD Pos DC Test Voltage V Neg DC Test Voltage Equalizer Mode Sec Data Carrier Detect Sec Clear To Send Sec Transmitted Data Transmitter Clock Sec Received Data Receiver Clock Unassigned Sec Request To Send Data Terminal Ready Signal Quality Detect Ring Indicator Data Rate Selector Ext Transmitter Clock Unassigned EIA RS 232 C Pin Assignments ONOoaBRWDND ONOaRWDND gt gt gt gt gt gt gt VURRVY T yt TT Vy B 4 Appendix B Serial Interface DTE Device DCE Device i Signal Abbreviation Frame Ground FG Transmitted Data TxD Received Data RxD Request To Send RTS Clear To Send CTS Data Set Ready Signal Ground Data Carrier Detect Data Terminal Ready Common RS 232 C y 3 U 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 Nm 00 0 01 WP Note that two signal names in this group Transmitted Data and Received Data are defined from the perspective of the DTE device The same terms are used however for DCE devices For DTE devices the Transmitted Data signal is assigned to Pin 2 and is a data output for DCE devices the Transmitted Data signal is also assigned to Pin 2 but is a data input To avoid confusion note that Transmitted Data and Received Data are misleading terms when used to describe DCE signals The following chart defines these and the other nine common RS 232 C
45. E 25 options 91 parameters E 5 printing E 2 start command E 9 strike 91 summary E 19 Baud 68 Beeper 17 Beeps 17 119 Bold print 74 Buffer size 70 Cables connecting interface 16 parallel interface C 3 serial interface B 9 Character download overlay 90 library 62 D 5 D 9 D 10 D 21 Character maps DEC 89 Epson 84 IBM 86 Character maps DEC Hebrew D 36 multilingual D 35 national use D 34 D 40 VT100 line draw D 37 Character maps Epson Hebrew D 21 language D 18 D 40 U S D 18 Character maps IBM code page 437 Hebrew D 25 code page 437 U S D 23 code page 850 multilingual D 28 code page 860 Portugal D 31 Character maps overlay Epson ESC 6 D 48 Epson ESC I D 46 menu selection 90 OCR A D 38 OCR B D 39 Character options 81 Character sets 47 D 1 D 42 ASCII standard D 6 Epson 83 Epson enhanced D 42 Epson standard code page D 50 factory default printouts DEC 44 Epson 40 IBM 42 IBM 2 multilingual D 44 IBM all character D 43 D 55 main character library D 5 D 9 D 10 DEC character sets 89 Epson character sets 83 IBM character sets 86 printing 37 process of creating 8 terminology D 4 Characteristics A 2 barcodes A 9 character sets A 6 copies A 4 emulations A 6 graphics A 10 human readable fonts A 8 memory configuration A 11 paper feed A 4 parallel interface A 11 printing mechanism A 2 ribbon A 6
46. ESC x Set Cancel NLQ ASCII ESC x n Control CTRL x n Decimal 27 120 n Hexadecimal 1B 78 n Sets and cancels near letter quality NLQ print n specifies whether NLQ printing is set or cancelled as follows e n 1or49 Set NLQ e n Oor48 Cancel NLQ The character following ESC is the lowercase letter x Note Near letter quality printing is available only in 10 12 and 15 pitch Example REM SELECT NLQ PRINT LPRINT CHR 27 x CHR 1 LPRINT This is NLQ print REM CANCEL NLQ SELECT DRAFT PRINT LPRINT CHR 27 x CHR 0 LPRINT This is draft print Operators Guide 213 ESC G Double Strike ASCII ESC G Control cTRL G Decimal 27 71 Hexadecimal 1B 47 Starts double strike printing Each line is printed with two passes of the printhead ESC G remains in effect until ESC H ESC n ESC Az n or SOH Az n is received See BASIC example in ESC H ESC H Cancel Double Strike ASCII ESC H Control cTRL H Decimal 27 72 Hexadecimal 1B 48 Cancels double strike set with ESC G ESC n SOH Az n or ESC Az n Example REM SET DOUBLE STRIKE PRINTING LPRINT CHR 27 G LPRINT In double strike mode REM CANCEL DOUBLE STRIKE PRINTING LPRINT CHR 27 H LPRINT Now in single strike mode ESCE Emphasized Mode Bold Strike ON ASCII ESC E Control cTAL E Decimal 27 69 Hexadecimal 1B 45 Begins emphasized printing All ch
47. Guide D 17 Configuration Menu Character Maps Emulation Dependent Character Maps Epson National Use Epson Hebrew IBM Code Page 437 U S IBM 2 Code Page 437 Hebrew IBM Code Page 850 Multilingual IBM Code Page 860 Portugal DEC National Use DEC Multilingual DEC Hebrew DEC VT100 Line Draw OCRA D 34 OCR B D 35 D 18 Appendix D Character Sets EPSON NATIONAL USE CHARACTER MAP 3 4 0 1 2 1 2 A B C D E F 63 Shown with 12 double boxed U S character substitutions See Page D 36 for other character substitutions A B C e P 192 2 A Q 161 177 193 l B R 162 178 194 210 C S 179 195 211 D T 180 196 212 0 2 3 4 5 E U 165 181 197 amp 6 8 9 8 lt 08 209 SP 160 176 I 1 F 166 182 198 7 G 167 183 199 21 NM N gj xj po s N om e de h m aaka arsA gt 174 190 175 191 o 168 184 a H 200 j J 202 K 203 L M 205 N 206 O 207 Operator s Guide N Cc o NM A o h X 232 248 I 23 i y 3 249 Zz A 234 250 D 19 D 20 Appendix D Character Sets EPSON HEBREW CHARACTER MAP 0 1 0 1 2 3 t 35 4 36 5 96 37 6 amp 38 7 8 9 A B C D E 0 176 1 A 161 177 1 162 178 194 163 179 195 164 180 196 26 5 E U amp 6 F 167 183 199 21 8 H 168 184 200 21 9 I i
48. J m 3 gt N A n o DEL 8 NUL SOW NUL MUL NUL MUL NUL BEL BS HT LF YT 9 NUL DCL DEZ DCS DCA NUL NUL NUL CAN NUL NUL ESC NUL NUL NUL NUL A R C D g Printout of Epson U S Character Set Factory Default for Epson Emulation B D p E E y n a b E s d t E tl f v g k h x 1 Y J a k i 1 K n P us o DEL JBO AM 38 Operations Active E Bod too mt ob dO p N o NUL SOH MUL NUL NUL NUL BIOL BEL BS HT L So Character HLH DEL DECR DCS PEA MUL NUL MUL CAN BELH NUL ESC NUL MUL MUL U u i Set 6 8 Printout of IBM 1 U S Character Set Q p a q b r c k e U f V u h x m 3 n Q NUL BUL SH NUL NUL NUL NUL NUL REL BS HT LE VT FF CR sa NUL MEL MUJI CAN NUL NUL ESC NUE NUL NUL NUL a naj na m Factory Default for IBM Emulation ah 3 JBO AN Active Character T NUL SOH BEIE BUH NUL EMG MUH BEL BS HT LF EF CR s i f i i i i r i 1 i f i i Ei vT D i i i i i i f i i f i Sd NUI DCL DCR BEA HUL MUL NUL MUL CAN NUL MUL ESC NUL MU
49. Mechanism NLQ Draft NLQ 75 Ipm 400 lpm 100 Ipm 62 Ipm 281 lpm 83 Ipm N A 285 lpm N A N A 193 Ipm N A N A 183 Ipm N A Printing Bidirectional short line logic seeking normally bidirectional or Direction selectable as unidirectional for text unidirectional for graphics Printheads Type Number of Heads Horizontal Distance Between Printheads Number of Wires Per Head Dot matrix impact using ballistic wire driven through ruby guides 3 Wide Carriage 4 4 in on centers Narrow Carriage 2 8 in on centers 9 Operator s Guide A 3 CHARACTERISTICS CONTINUED Printing Mechanism continued Diameter of 0 014 in 0 356 mm Wire Duty Cycle No limitation when printing rolling ASCII characters 60 lines at 136 characters per line when printing same character Printhead Wide Carriage Optimized for 13 2 in wide column Carriage Narrow Carriage Optimized for 8 0 in wide column Line Length Up to 13 6 in with either narrow or wide carriage Copies Original 5 copies max See Paper Requirements Paper Feed Paper Feed Adjustable pull tractors for continuous forms Method Paper Path Front and bottom loading A 4 Appendix A Specifications CHARACTERISTICS CONTINUED Paper Feed continued Paper Handling Capacity Label Handling Capacity Line Spacing Vertical Pitch in Lines In Line Feed Increments Total thickness must not exceed 0 018 in 0 46 mm based on follow
50. Off Sub Superscript On Off Char Inch 12 0 15 0 16 67 17 14 18 2 5 0 6 0 7 5 8 33 8 57 9 1 10 0 Slash Zero Off On FORMS OPTIONS Lines Inch 8 Ipi 6 Ipi Form Length 420 0 mm 297 0 mm 210 mm 148 5 mm 0 5 11 0 31 5 in Skip Perf On Off LF on CR On Off CR on LF Off On Paper Jam Detect Off On Paper Speed 5 inches sec 11 inches sec 2 EMULATION IBM Proprinter XL DEC LA210 Epson FX 100 Operators Guide 53 CHARACTER OPTIONS Epson Character Options Epson Control Code Map Epson IBM 1 Epson IBM 2 Epson Epson Character Map France Germany U K Denmark Sweden Italy Epson Spain Japan Norway Denmark II Spain Il Latin America Hebrew Italy ANSI U S Epson IBM 19 Page 850 Multilingual 860 Portugal 437 U S Epson IBM 428 Page 850 Multilingual 860 Portugal 437 Hebrew 437 U S IBM Character Options IBM Control Code Map IBM 2 IBM 1 IBM 17 Page 850 Multilingual 860 Portugal 437 U S IBM 28 Page 850 Multilingual 860 Portugal 437 Hebrew 437 U S DEC Character Options DEC Character Set 7 Bit DEC 8 Bit DEC Go9 France Germany U K Denmark Sweden Italy ANSI Spain Hebrew Finland Canada French Multilingual VT100 Line Draw U S U S France Germany U K Denmark Sweden Italy ANSI Spain Hebrew Finland Canada French Multilingual VT100 Line Draw VT100 Line Draw U S France Germany U K Denmark Sweden Italy ANSI S
51. Pin 2 on the printer is tied to RxD Pin 3 on the IBM PC Lastly the control signals are connected DTR Pin 20 on the printer to DSR Pin 6 on the IBM PC and RTS Pin 4 on the printer to CTS Pin 5 on the IBM PC When the printer powers up it always raises the voltage on its Pin 20 DTR and maintains it in an elevated state The PC receives this signal on Pin 6 DSR and interprets it to mean that the printer is available B 12 Appendix B Serial Interface When the PC has data to send it looks for a high voltage input on its Pin 5 CTS before sending data The printer actually holds the voltage continuously high on its Pin 4 RTS which is tied to the PC s Pin 5 Thus the PC automatically begins sending data on its Pin 2 and continue until all data are sent or transmission is interrupted by a handshaking protocol IBM PC PRINTER A DTE DEVICE Pin Signal Cable Signal Pin 1 FG FG 1 I NM oid 3 lt RxD RxD gt 3 4 gt RIS RIS lt 4 5 lt CS SH CIS gt 5 6 lt DSR DSR gt 6 7 SG SG 7 8 lt DCD DCD gt 8 20 gt DTR DIR lt IBM PC to Printer Wiring Diagram ABO AO IBM PC AT TO PRINTER The wiring diagram that follows shows how to connect an IBM PC AT a DTE device to the printer also a DTE device It differs from the IBM PC example only in the pin numb
52. REM FORMAT UPC A BARCODE SYMBOL LPRINT CHR 1 AzM CHR 13 CHR 12 CHR 1 LPRINT CHR 1 CHR 3 CHR 1 CHR 3 CHR 1 REM START BARCODE LPRINT CHR 1 AzL1 REM PRINT BARCODE SYMBOL ENCODING CHARACTERS REM 1234567890 REM NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER IS 0 CHECK DIGIT IS 5 LPRINT 012345678905 CHR 13 REM END BARCODE LPRINT CHRS 1 AZLO TE m wd uS 09d uU JB0 BJ1 Operator s Guide E 21 ALTERNATE COMMANDS For best results use the commands explained earlier in this appendix to format and print barcodes To provide compatibility with other printers the following alternate barcode commands are also supported They are valid only when the printer is in Epson emulation mode e ESC 8t Start Barcode command Performs the same function as SOH AzL1 e ESC 4t Start Barcode command Performs the same function as SOH AzL2 e ESC P1 P8 Barcode Format command Performs the same function as SOH AzM P1 P8 e ESC t End Barcode command Performs the same function as SOH AzLO Note The procedure to format and print barcodes using these commands is the same as explained on the preceding pages The Barcode Format command must be in the form ESC P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 Adjacent semicolons preceding a parameter value indicate that the preceding parameters are to remain unchanged For example to set P4 to a value of 2 without changing other parameters use ESC 1 2 T
53. Reset to Power Up Settings ASCII SOH A z X 0 Control CTRLA A Z X 0 Decimal 1 65 122 88 48 Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 58 30 Resets the printer to power up default settings The printer functions as specified in the configuration menu To reset the printer to factory default settings use the configuration menu can be decimal 0 or ASCII character Operators Guide 143 SOHAz Set Pitch and Strike ASCII SOH A z n Control CTRLA A Z n Decimal 1 65 122 33 n Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 21 n Specifies the number of characters per inch pitch and degree of boldness strike Binary values for n are as follows Bit Setting 7 16 67 pitch 6 Ignored 5 O disable enlarged double wide printing 1 enable enlarged double wide printing 4 O disable double strike printing 1 enable double strike printing 3 O disable emphasized bold strike printing 1 enable emphasized bold strike printing 2 0 Specifies pitch other than 16 67 as follows 000 10 pitch 001 12 pitch 010 15pitch 011 12 pitch 100 17 14 pitch 101 18 2 pitch 110 18 2 pitch 111 18 2 pitch Decimal values for n are shown on the next page Decimal values for n are as follows Pitch Single Double Bold Extra 144 Universal Control Commands 18 2 5 6 7 21 22 23 13 14 15 17 14 4 50 12 16 67 128 144 136 15 0 2 18 10 12 0 1 3 17 19 9 11 10 0 0 16 8 9 1 37 38 39 53 54 55 45 46 47 8 57
54. SI command Current Pitch After SI or ESC SI 5 0 8 33 6 0 9 1 7 5 9 1 10 0 16 67 12 0 18 2 15 0 18 2 Current character pitches of 8 33 8 57 9 1 16 67 17 14 and 18 2 are unaffected by this command See DC2 to cancel condensed pitch Example REM SET TO 10 PITCH THEN REM CHANGE TO 17 14 PITCH AS FOLLOWS LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 33 CHR 0 LPRINT Now printing in 10 cpi Operators Guide 207 LPRINT CHR 15 LPRINT Now printing in 17 14 cpi LPRINT CHR 13 DC2 Cancel Condensed Pitch ASCII DC2 Control CTRL R Decimal 18 Hexadecimal 12 Cancels condensed pitch set by SI or ESC SI Returns to the pitch that was set prior to using SI or ESC SI New Pitch Previous After SI or ESC After Ptich Sl DC2 5 0 8 33 5 0 6 0 9 1 6 0 7 5 9 1 7 5 10 0 16 67 10 0 12 0 18 2 12 0 15 0 18 2 15 0 Note To reset 7 5 or 15 0 pitch use the universal control command SOH Az Example REM CHANGE FROM 10 PITCH TO 17 14 PITCH LPRINT CHR 15 LPRINT Printing in 17 14 pitch REM CANCEL 17 14 PITCH RETURN TO 10 PITCH LPRINT CHR 18 LPRINT Printing in 10 pitch Epson FX 100 Control Commands ESCM Select Elite Pitch ASCII ESC M Control cTRL M Decimal 27 77 Hexadecimal 1B 4D Selects elite pitches according to the table below Current character pitches of 6 0 8 33 9 1 12 0 16 67 and 18 2 are unaffected by this command Current Pitch After ESC M 5 0 6 0 8
55. The following sections explain in greater detail the various setting options within the printer s configuration menu Each option is listed in order under its respective menu heading HELP Status Print Pressing YES prints out the present default settings similar to the printout on Page 60 Menu Tree Pressing YES prints out a profile of the configuration menu options EMULATION and CHARACTER OPTIONS do not appear in the configuration menu tree if Lock Character Set and Emulation Page 92 is On Non Default List Pressing YES prints out a list of the present default settings which differ from the original factory default settings Operators Guide 55 Print All Options Pressing YES prints out a list of all options and all possible option settings Hot Key List Pressing YES prints out a list of all power on and on line hot keys Diagnostic Codes Pressing YES prints out a reference list of beep patterns for recoverable and nonrecoverable failures 56 Configuration Print Active Character Set Pressing YES prints out a chart of all present character and control code assignments similar to those illustrated on Pages 37 through 39 See Printing the Active Character Set Page 35 for more details INTERFACE OFTIONS Active Interface Serial Options Frotocal DTR Folarity Robust X ON X O0FF when Off Line Baud Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Input Buffer Size FRINT STYLE Near Letter Quality Bi Dire
56. The sprocket holes should be clearly and cleanly cut Forms should be fanfolded at every horizontal perforated line Both edges of each perforation should not be torn Intersection of the horizontal and vertical perforations should not be cut A 18 Appendix A Specifications Labels Label size and print area are shown in the following illustration E N EN IN 0R 0 079 in 2 mm min 8 TJ Label H 3 id blank Base Label Paper With label No label blank blank e The total thickness of label and base paper should not exceed 0 18 mm e Label forms shall not be left in the printer e The label adhesion should be so strong that no label comes off or partially separates from the base paper after a label form has been left in the printer for 72 hours at room temperature e Feed labels only from the bottom The temperature range allowable for label printing is 40 F to 95 F 5 C to 35 C Appendix B Serial Interface This appendix deals with RS 232 C and RS 422 A serial interface connectivity SERIAL INTERFACE BASICS RS 232 C commonly referred to as RS 232 is a serial interface communication standard developed by the Electronics Industries Association EIA which defines communication signals pin assignments and voltage levels The standard divides equipment into two categories e Data Terminal Equipment DTE e Data Communication Equipment DCE
57. aaa nene nenes reve vene eee meet D 5 Standard U S ASCII Character Set sesssssssssss D 6 The Control Code Map aaa nene nene nenen enen e reve eee D 11 Epson Control Code Map ssssseeee D 12 IBM Control Code Maps ssseeme D 13 DEC 7 Bit CO Control Code Map sees D 14 DEC 8 Bit Control Code Maps shuan nana nenen D 15 The Character Maps usine t o rn ea e o b ca t D 16 Epson National Use Character Map D 18 XX Contents Appendix D Character Sets continued Epson Hebrew Character Map essseseesss D 21 IBM Code Page 437 U S aa aaaaaaaaaaanana nanen nene nene e nene D 23 IBM 2 Code Page 437 Hebrew cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees D 25 IBM Code Page 850 Multilingual D 28 IBM Code Page 860 Portugal ssssssss D 31 DEC National Use Character Map D 34 DEC Multilingual Character Map sssss D 35 DEC Hebrew Character Map seeseeessees D 36 DEC VT100 Line Draw Character Map D 37 OCR A Overlay Character Map ssussssss D 38 OCR B Overlay Character Map susessssss D 39 Character Substitutions for Epson National Use Character Map D 40 Character S
58. an ABO AI1 Use ESC L to print double density graphics at double density speed Use ESC Y to print double density graphics at single density speed ESC Y causes alternate dots to be skipped during printing The maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved per line in double density graphics is 1632 Operators Guide 233 Note n 216 vertical line spacing may be used in graphic printing n 216 in line spacing is approximated using 1 144 in steps Maximum local and cumulative error is 1 216 in The operation of double density graphics and quad density is the same as single density For more information refer to the description of the Single Density Graphics command ESC K Example REM PRINT 2 SOLID BARS 150 DOT PATTERNS IN REM LENGTH USING DOUBLE DENSITY GRAPHICS FORI 1TO2 LPRINT CHR 27 L CHR 150 CHR 0 FOR J 1 TO 150 LPRINT CHR 255 NEXT J LPRINT NEXT END 234 IBM Proprinter Control Commands ESCZ Quad Density Graphics ASCII ESC Z n1 n2 d1 d3264 Control cTRL Z n1 n2 d1 d3264 Decimal 27 90 n1 n2 d1 d3264 Hexadecimal 1B 5A n1 n2 d1 d3264 Causes the printer to print quadruple density graphics Quadruple density graphics are printed in synthesized 240 dot columns per horizontal in The maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved per line in quad density graphics is 3264 The printer prints half as many dot columns a
59. and Print Area B gt o qe E i 9 o D o o F A o o 9 9 9 9 Te cR VET 9 i o 9 Symbol Description Specification Form Length Paper Width 1st Character Column Vertical Sprocket Spacing Print Area Horizontal Sprocket Position 0 5 to 31 5 in approx 12 7 to 800 mm in 1 in inc 3 to 16 in approx 76 2 to 406 4 mm 0 55 to 0 88 in approx 14 to 22 35 mm 0 50 in 13 6 in approx 342 9 mm max 0 25 in or 6 00 mm Form length as selected in the configuration menu The actual paper length is continuous Longer form lengths and a No Form mode are available in some emulations Multipart Forms Operator s Guide A 15 Multiple part forms should be secured on both sides with glue or crimp fasteners Paper When using multipart forms consider the following e When the forms are unfolded the height of the bulge at the outfold should not exceed the follovving depending upon the forms thickness Total thickness t of forms Allovvable height of bulge t lt 0 012 in 0 3 mm 0 079 in 2 mm 0 012 in t 0 022 in 0 118 in 3 mm 0 3 mm t 0 55 mm cas HH 0 079 or 0 118 in max p A 2 or 3 mm MC E This limitation applies to the multipart forms fastened vvith any method The maximum displacement of the center of the sprocket holes between sheets shall not exceed 0 5
60. been enabled using ESC SP 7 CSI Control Sequence Introducer ASCII CSI Control not applicable Decimal 155 Hexadecimal 9B Performs the same function as ESC ESC is always valid CSI is valid only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7 For example ESC z and CSI z are recognized by the printer as identical commands each sets line spacing to 6 lines per in Operators Guide 291 ESC P n q d1 dx Graphics ASCII ESC P n q d1 dx Control CTRL P n q d1 dx Decimal 27 80 n 113 d1 dx Hexadecimal 1B 50 n 71 d1 dx Causes the printer to print graphics dot columns n specifies the graphics density This determines the horizontal dot column spacing the horizontal dots per inch the horizontal overlap the aspect ratio the dot columns per line and the inches per line The values for n are shown in the tables below Graphics Densities The table below assumes any pitch other than 12 0 or 6 0 set prior to beginning graphics Dots Aspect Dots Inches n inch Overlap ratio line line 2 240 64 2996 3 36 3168 13 2 3 240 64 2996 3 36 3168 13 2 4 150 52 38 2 08 1980 13 2 5 0 or1 120 40 48 1 67 1584 13 2 6 100 28 57 1 39 1320 13 2 7 100 28 57 1 39 1320 13 2 8 75 04 76 1 04 990 13 2 9 75 04 76 1 04 990 13 2 292 DECLA210 Control Command
61. cTRL R Decimal 27 82 Hexadecimal 1B 52 Cancels all vertical and horizontal tab settings Restores power on horizontal tab settings one tab stop every eight positions starting at Column 9 256 IBM Proprinter Control Commands DEC LA210 Control Commands This section describes the control codes and control commands you can use while the printer is in DEC LA210 emulation mode Before using these commands read the section entitled Control Commands An Introduction It describes the typographic conventions and other information needed to send these commands in the correct format 258 DEC LA210 Control Commands INDEX OF CONTROL CODES AND COMMANDS Character Maps Select GO Select G1 Select G2 Select G3 Map GO into Lower Data Bytes Map G1 into Lower Data Bytes Map G2 into Lower Data Bytes Map G3 into Lower Data Bytes Map G1 into Upper Data Bytes Map G2 into Upper Data Bytes Map G3 into Upper Data Bytes Print Next Character From G2 Print Next Character From G3 Lines Per Inch Set Line Spacing Set 6 Lines Per Inch Set 8 Lines Per Inch Set 12 Lines Per Inch Set 2 Lines Per Inch Set 3 Lines Per Inch Set 4 Lines Per Inch ESC n ESC n ESC n ESC n SI SO ESCn ESC o ESC ESC ESC ESC N or SS2 n ESC O or SS3 n ESC n z ESC zor ESC O z or ESCI1z ESC 2z ESC 3z ESC 4z ESC 5z ESC 6z 284 285 285 285 286 286 286 287 287 287 288
62. characters stored in RAM by changing the data byte source using SOH Az or the Overlay Characters option in the configuration menu The following pages describe the format of the command used to download characters Examples and blank matrixes for designing your own characters are provided at the end of this subsection After your new characters are downloaded you can use the Print Data Byte Map option on the configuration menu to see how they appear in print 162 Universal Control Commands SOHAz amp Download Characters ASCII SOH A Zz amp m n1 n2 a13 atp c1 cx Control CTRLA A Z amp m n1 n2 814 a15 c1 cx Decimal 1 65 122 38 m n1 n2 814 a15 c1 cx Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 26 m n1 n2 a13 a1p c1 Cx s Defines and dovvnloads to RAM temporary memory bit image data for one or more characters Before downloading characters use the configuration menu to set the printer to accept downloaded characters The format for downloading characters is shown here Additional information on designing storing and printing download characters is given on the preceding pages In the Download Character command m specifies whether the characters are selected for printing or downloaded but not selected This parameter performs the same function as the Select Character Source and Library command SOH Az and that command may be used at any time to change the setting ma
63. columns If Linefeed Newline is enabled attempting to move the active column more than one column right of the right margin executes a linefeed newline Operators Guide 303 PRINT DIRECTION ESC 41h Unidirectional Printing ASCII ESC 4 1 h Control cTRLI I 2 4 1 h Decimal 27 91 63 52 49 104 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3F 34 31 68 Begins unidirectional printing Data are printed only when the printhead is moving left to right Printing this way improves vertical character alignment Unidirectional printing remains in effect until reset with ESC 4 1 I Note f set to ON PRINTSTYLE Bi Directional Graphics NLQ in the configuration menu overrides unidirectional printing ESCI2411 Bidirectional Printing ASCII ESC 4 1 I Control CTRL 4 1 I Decimal 27 91 63 52 49 108 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3F 34 31 6C Begins bidirectional printing Data are printed when the printhead is moving in either direction This is the default print mode It remains in effect until reset by ESC 4 1 h 304 DEC LA210 Control Commands TABS ESC H or ESC 1 Set Horizontal Tab at Current Column3 ASCII ESC H Control CTRL H Decimal 27 72 Hexadecimal 1B 48 ASCII ESC 1 Control CTRL 1 Decimal 27 49 Hexadecimal 1B 31 Adds a horizontal tab at the current column but not at a physical position on the paper Both control commands perform the same function ESC gor ESC
64. contains codes to select bold versus normal type near letter quality versus draft quality pitch character set and on and on In other words the software application changes the printer s settings for the present print job It does not change the defaults because the next time the printer is turned on the factory or customized defaults are reset The computer s software application can and does change most optional settings but not all For example the software application does not change the parallel versus serial port settings and it does not change from the Epson FX 100 emulation to for example the IBM Proprinter XL emulation Choosing the right options for these types of setting the ones that software applications do not change is the main focus of the configuration menu If your printers present performance is satisfactory then the configuration is likely set correctly for your needs and no changes to the configuration are necessary However if the printer s performance requires alteration or improvement then adjustment of the configuration may be appropriate The following is an explanation of the navigation of the configuration menu where the default settings can be found and when necessary changed Control commands are covered in other sections of this manual Operators Guide 47 THE CONFIGURATION MENU The configuration menu consists of 42 changeable default settings eight report help options a perform
65. cx Draft and NLQ characters are automatically calculated from this data 164 Universal Control Commands e ap t Near Letter Quality Send 40 columns of character data for c1 through cx These characters may be printed only when NLQ printing is enabled See Print Quality earlier in this section Both aa and ap must be provided for each character in the range n1 through n2 c1 through cx specify the columns of pin fire patterns for the downloaded character and the intercharacter space For example if a1p 0 send 10 columns of data c1 c10 If alp 1 send 40 columns of data c1 c40 c1 through cx must accompany each character specified by aq and ap in the range n1 through n2 To calculate c1 through cx design the character within a matrix as shown earlier in this subsection Note All cells may be defined but the printer ignores any data entered in Column 10 draft and Columns 20 and 40 NLQ Use the columns on the right side of the matrix to define the space between characters The standard intercharacter space is two columns Columns 8 and 9 When the character is designed add the cell values vertically by column for each row beginning at the upper left In the examples shown on the next page the cell values for ascending characters are shown on the left side of the matrix Ascending characters are printed by the top eight pins of the printhead The cell values for descending characters are shown on t
66. feeds minus one from the text following the barcode For example if you specify a barcode symbol 3 4 in high and if the text line spacing is set at 6 lines per in a total of four lines plus a fraction of a line is required to print the barcode The fraction of a line is rounded up for a total of five lines This number of line feeds less one is discarded therefore the next four line feeds after the barcode SOH AzL2 are discarded BARCODE DATA This section provides information on entering barcode data including e Valid characters for each type of barcode e How to enter barcode data e Adjusting the width of the quiet zone e Spacing e Controlling the placement of PostNet barcode symbols e Error checking e Number system characters Operators Guide E 11 e Start characters stop characters and guard bars e Summary of required barcode data VALID CHARACTERS Each type of barcode has a defined set of valid characters If an invalid character is detected for a particular code the printer prints a pattern of all bars or a solid bar invalid symbol to flag that error The following shows the valid characters for each type of barcode Code 39 0123456789 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ SPACE Yo Lowercase letters are printed in a barcode symbol identical to uppercase letters The associated human readable line shows the correct case Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC EAN 0123456789 0123456789 Codabar Styles 9
67. front entrance of printer Prevent the paper from contacting the front of the printer stand or table or desk edges if not using the stand Any excessive load or friction on in feed paper will result in paper handling problems T The printer is shipped with a stand that allows paper to be fed from the bottom If you intend to feed paper from the front you must first remove a 16 in foam plug from the front feed guide 24 Operations Do not let paper drag on edge of stand table or desk Front Feed JBO AG2 Bottom Feed JBO AH1 Left Tractor JBO L1 8 Close retainers Operators Guide 25 Align paper on tractor sprockets Make sure that the paper is straight Adjust the position of the right tractor so that the paper is neither stressed nor buckled The sprocket pins should sit comfortably in the middle of the paper s sprocket holes Paper holes should not be distorted 9 Make sure both tractors are locked in position 10 Adjust the printhead gap e f you reloaded the printer with the same type of paper simply return the printhead gap adjustment lever to its previous position e f you reloaded with a different thickness or weight of paper see Adjusting the Printhead Gap Page 27 11 Set top of form See Setting Top of Form Page 30 26 Operations ADJUSTING THE PRINTHEAD GAP Warning Make sure no article of clothing necktie jewelry is hanging into the oper
68. g1 gx Decimal 1 65 122 42 d1 d2 r c1 c2 g1 gx Hexadecimal 01 41 TA 2A d1 d2 r c1 c2 g1 gx This command causes the printer to print graphics d1 and d2 specify the graphics density to be printed d1 is the least significant lower byte of the graphics density and d2 is the most significant upper byte r specifies graphics resolution as follows r2 0 skip horizontally adjacent dots this setting may increase graphics print speed r2 1 print all dots C1c2 specify the number of dot columns to reserve for graphics c1 is the least significant byte and c2 is the most significant byte of the represented number The method of representing the number of dot columns is the same way as that for d1d2 described in the following paragraph d1d2 specify the graphic density If the value is less than 256 d1 is the number itself and d2 is 0 For values over 256 divide the total number of 256 d2 is the number of complete groups of 256 and d1 is the remainder For example 120 is expressed as 120 0 and 360 is expressed as 1 104 Graphic density options and corresponding maximum available dot columns are shown on the next page Operators Guide 173 10 Pitch 12 Pitch Maximum Dot Maximum Dot Density Columns Per Line Density Columns Per Line d1d2 c1c2 d1d2 c1c2 50 680 60 816 60 816 72 979 75 1020 90 1224 100 1360 120 1632 120 1632 144 1958 150 2040 180 2448 200 2720 240
69. in decimal data bytes Hexadecimal the sequence in hexadecimal data bytes All four command formats are equivalent Operators Guide 135 PARAMETERS Parameters are indicated with the following notations n n1 n2 etc and d d1 d2 etc The printer expects to receive a data byte for each parameter The parentheses are not sent only the value of parameter n or d For example if n 1 in Epson IBM or most universal control commands then a decimal value of 1 notthe ASCII character 1 is sent to the printer On the other hand in DEC control commands n 1 is the value of ASCII character 1 decimal 49 In some universal control commands you can specify n 1 as either decimal 1 or as the ASCII character 1 n1 n10 The printer expects to receive from one to ten specific parameters n1 n2 x 256 Because the printer does not use decimal numbers larger than 255 some commands use two bytes of data n1 and n2 to specify one value Both n1 and n2 must be in the range 0 to 255 Two data bytes must be supplied even if only one is needed Ifa value less than 256 is needed n1 is the number itself and n2 is O For values equal to or greater than 256 divide the total number needed by 256 n2 is the number of complete groups of 256 and n1 is the remainder If you are using a programming language with MOD modulus and INT integer functions you can use the following formulas in which n is the total number neede
70. in the active characters set with these OCR characters Your selection also becomes the default condition when you turn on the printer for example if you have selected the OCR A overlay and the NLQ mode as defaults then the active characters are OCR A characters when you turn on the printer See Appendix D for OCR character maps If you press YES to Accept User Defined Characters then downloaded characters presently in and or subsequently downloaded to RAM using universal control commands can be mapped to the active character set For the printer to accept downloaded customized characters Input Buffer Size must be set to Minimum Page 70 Unlike ROM resident OCR characters RAM resident downloaded characters are lost when you turn off the printer OCR characters are only allowed in Near Letter Quality NLQ mode You cannot print OCR in draft quality mode 86 Configuration BARCODE OPTIONS Pressing YES prints out the first of the barcode options listed below e Barcode Strike e Barcode Density Barcode Strike Pressing YES prints out the active setting e Double Strike factory default e Single Strike Double Strike For barcodes double strike is analogous to bold text For this the printhead carriage moves slightly to the right and reprints the same single strike pattern Single Strike For barcodes single strike is analogous to normal text The width of a single strike varies depending on the barcode sym
71. lt n2 lt 132 ni 1 sn2 sz 158 ni 1 sn2 lt 198 Operators Guide 281 e 16 67 pitch ni 1 x n2 lt 219 e 182pitch ni 1 lt n2 lt 240 If n2 is greater than the upper limit the maximum permitted value is assumed Note Selecting or cancelling font pitches changing the print quality to draft or NLQ or changing the print area modifies horizontal margin settings If n1 or n2 sets the margins past the print area defined with control command ESC I n1 n2 s the sequence is ignored If the active column is greater than the new right margin the next printable character activates the Auto Wraparound feature The following example sets the right and left margins at approximately 1 25 in assuming an 81 7 in wide paper at 10 character columns per in Example LPRINT CHR 27 13 67s ESC n r Top Margin ASCII ESC n r Control crR I n r Decimal 27 91 n 114 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 72 Sets the top margin to Line n The maximum value of n is the form length set with control sequence ESC n t The top margin is reset to Line 1 if the form length is changed Changing the lines per inch does not affect the top margin setting 282 DEC LA210 Control Commands ESC n r Bottom Margin ASCII ESC E n r Control CTRL n r Decimal 27 91 59 n 114 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3B n 72 Sets the bottom margin to Line n The maximum value of n is one line less than the form length set wit
72. p M FS OO OO pe p p p p n O p p p poppe D 50 Appendix D Character Sets IBM 2 ALL CHARACTER MULTILINGUAL CHARACTER SET Also called the multilingual PC 8 character set Operators Guide D 51 160 176 192 208 EXESESENESE 12 145 161 177 193 209 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247 KEE 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251 140 156 172 188 204 22 141 157 173 189 205 221 142 158 174 190 2 222 143 159 ERE D 52 Appendix D Character Sets Appendix E Barcodes This appendix explains how to use the printer to print barcodes Barcodes are printed in accordance with Automatic Identification Manufacturers AIM Material Handling Institute Inc the UPC Symbol Specification Manual and the U S Postal Service The barcodes supported are listed below Barcode Description Barcode Description Code 39 USD 3 UPC E s Interleaved 2 of 5 USD 1 EAN 8 Codabar USS CODABAR EAN 13 UPC A i PostNet xx Detailed descriptions for commercial barcodes are available from Automatic ldentification Manufacturers Material Handling Institute Inc 1326 Freeport Road Pittsburgh PA 15238 USA 412 963 8588 Additional information is contained in Reading Between
73. print buffer and then reset the character cursor to the first character position Operators Guide 75 Paper Jam Detect Pressing YES prints out e Off e On factory default The printer uses a paper motion sensor on top of the left tractor to detect paper jams If the paper is supposed to move but it does not then the printer flashes the PAPER indicator and sounds the beeper Off Disables paper jam detection On Enables paper jam detection Paper Speed Pressing YES prints out e 11 in sec factory default e 5 in sec This is often referred to as the slew rate 11 in sec This the normal slew rate for single part 18 lb paper 5 in sec Consider using this slower slew rate for very light heavy or multipart paper The slower slew rate is gentler on the paper s sprocket holes 16 Configuration EMULATION Note Emulation cannot be changed and does not appear as a configuration menu option if Lock Character Set and Emulation Page 92 is set to On Pressing YES prints out the active emulation e Epson FX 100 factory default e IBM Proprinter XL e DEC LA210 CHARACTER OPTIONS Note Character Options cannot be changed and does not appear as a configuration menu option if Lock Character Set and Emulation Page 92 is set to On Pressing YES prints out the first of the character options listed below e Epson Character Options e IBM Character Options e DEC Character Options e Overla
74. printed when NLQ printing is enabled LPRINT CHR 1 Az amp CHR 1 CHR 48 CHR 48 CHR 0 CHR 1 FOR X 1 TO 40 READ Y LPRINT CHR Y NEXT X DATA 129 0 130 0 132 0 136 0 144 0 160 0 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DATA 0 130 0 132 0 136 0 144 0 160 0 192 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Operators Guide 171 Use the matrixes below to design your characters Cell Val ae Cell Val per 49123456789410 19123456 7 8 910 Characters Cell Values Characters Cell Values 128 Descending 128 Descending Characters Characters 64 128 64 128 32 64 32 64 16 32 16 32 8 16 8 16 4 8 4 8 2 4 2 4 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 w12345678910 12345678910 Characters Cell Values Characters Cell Values 128 Descending 128 Descending Characters Characters 64 128 64 128 32 64 32 64 16 32 16 32 8 16 8 16 4 8 4 8 2 4 2 4 1 2 1 2 1 1 2411234567 8 910 2411234567 8 910 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 ABO AA1 172 Universal Control Commands SOHAz Universal Graphics ASCII SOH A Z T d1 d2 r c1 c2 g1 gx Control CTRLA A Z kj d1 d2 r c1 c2
75. printer encounters a nonrecoverable error tt t problem persists record beep pattern and then see BEEPs in Troubleshooting Chart Page 119 Tt Tum off printer and then turn back on If problem persists record beep pattern Press ON LINE several times to solicit additional beep patterns if any then see BEEPs in Troubleshooting Chart Page 119 20 Basics Operations COMMON OPERATIONS LOADING PAPER Left Tractor JBO AF1 Loading Paper 22 Operations To load paper follow these steps 1 Open operator access door 2 If you plan on loading the same type of paper note the setting of the printhead gap adjustment lever and then move printhead gap adjustment lever toward you away from paper as far as possible 3 If necessary reposition tractors to accommodate a change in paper vvidth as follovvs a Keep the left tractor locked at the extreme left end ofits travel b Lift lock lever on right tractor c Slide right tractor along its shafts and position it in relationship to the left t ractor to approximately match the vvidth of the paper Lock Lever d For novv leave the right tractor unlocked Right Tractor JBo N Note The paper out sensor is located near the left edge of the paper path below the platen Normally to prevent a false paper out alarm keep the left tractor at the extreme left end of the platen Move only the right tractor to accommodate changes in paper width
76. second BIT Bit is an acronym for binary digit one of the two digits 0 and 1 used in binary notation Usually eight bits are used to make up one character or data byte BUFFER Two buffers are used A print buffer consisting of temporary memory in which the printer holds incoming print jobs and a dedicated line buffer which holds the next line of characters or graphics to be printed CHARACTER DOWNLOADING Process of defining bit image data used to print a character and assigning it to a data byte value between 0 and 255 Download characters are stored in RAM temporary memory G 2 Glossary CHARACTER LIBRARY A defined group of printable characters stored in the printer CHARACTER MAP An assignment of printable characters to some data byte values between 0 and 255 CHARACTER NUMBER MAP Each character in a character library is numbered The character number map specifies which characters are currently selected for each data byte value between 0 and 255 CHARACTER OPTIONS Used to select the appearance of printed characters selected using the configuration menu accessed from the printer switch panel or by sending control commands from the computer CHARACTER SET A complete assignment of control codes and printable character codes for all byte values between 0 and 255 Typically the character set is built from a character map and a control code map CHARACTER SOURCE MAP Describes the location of the character libr
77. static electricity Temperature humidity and other factors influence static buildup e Low relative humidity tends to encourage static buildup Prefer to keep the relative humidity in the printer room above 40 In general since warmer environments tend to have higher relative humidity levels prefer a warmer room to a colder one e Avoid storing paper in an overly dry location Instead store paper at the same temperature and humidity levels of the printer or allow paper to acclimate overnight before loading that paper in the printer Besides encouraging static electricity an overly dry location robs paper of its built in moisture content Typically 596 of paper weight is water When paper loses this built in moisture it curls Operators Guide 91 e Wool as well as many synthetic carpeting materials are notorious for causing static electricity If the site has carpeting consider using an anti static spray on the area surrounding the printer or place an anti static mat under the printer stand If you use an anti static spray do not spray the printer or the paper CLEANING Warning Remember to turn off power and unplug the printer before cleaning interior or exterior surfaces INTERIOR SURFACES Paper dust is inevitable If desired use a vacuum cleaner to remove paper dust from the area beneath the ribbon cartridge and printhead carriage Prefer using a vacuum cleaner specially designed for electronic equipment Avoi
78. used in the message The message remains in permanent memory until a new message is defined The following example defines the message LA210 Example LPRINT CHR 27 P1v4C41323130 LPRINT CHR 27 ENQ Return Answer Back Message ASCII ENQ Control CTRL E Decimal 5 Hexadecimal 05 Returns the message defined with the Define Answer Back Message command ESC P 1 v h1 hx The message is sent back to the host on the serial port 290 DECLA210 Control Commands DCS 1v Device Control String ASCII DCS 1 v h1 h30 Control not applicable Decimal 144 49 118 h1 h30 Hexadecimal 90 31 76 h1 h30 Performs the same function as ESC P 1 v that is it introduces a graphics string or enters an Answer Back message string DCS is valid only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7 ESC or ST String Terminator ASCII ESC N Control cTRL Decimal 27 92 Hexadecimal 1B 5C ASCII ST Control not applicable Decimal 156 Hexadecimal 9C Exits graphics mode and returns to text processing mode Also terminates a Define Answer Back Message or Device Control String Both commands perform the same function ST is valid only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have
79. want If Input Buffer Size is set to Minimum you can download up to 128 different characters Download characters cannot be remapped 154 Universal Control Commands DESIGNING DOWNLOAD CHARACTERS Design the character within a matrix of 10 dot columns by 9 dot rows like the one shown below Column 10 is always blank 12 9 4 5 6 78 9 10 Characters Cell Values 128 Coe aracters 64 128 32 64 16 32 8 16 4 8 2 4 1 2 1 Character Design Matrix ABO R Operators Guide 155 The cell values are used to tell the printer which printhead pins fire to create the character The cell value for each column is a binary value that corresponds to the printhead pins used to print the dots in that row Eight of the nine printhead pins are used to print the character Characters that ascend above the character waistline such as h t A M are printed by the top eight pins Use the top eight rows on the matrix to design ascending characters Characters that descend below the baseline such as p g y are printed by the lower eight pins Use the bottom eight rows on the matrix to design descending characters Using cell values to calculate character data is shown later in this section Intercharacter Space Ascending 12345678910 1234567 89 10
80. you perform one or all of these actions 1 Map various printable characters from the character library to a range of data byte values 2 Download some characters you design to RAM temporary memory and select some of the download characters to print by changing the character source to RAM 3 Select a new emulation mode overwriting any mapped characters and control codes but not the download characters Operators Guide 149 4 Select a new character set overwriting any mapped characters and control codes but not the download characters 5 Reset the printer to factory defaults overwriting all prior selections See the illustration below SOHAzB e sit 2 Download Characters SOHAZz amp Select Character Source SOH Az 96 Select Emulation jte Characters 1 i Reset to Y Select Factory Defaults Character Set Modifying the Data Byte Map Additional Options ABO O At any time you can see the characters and control codes currently assigned to each data byte value Use the configuration menu to print a data byte map Character set character map and emulation settings should be made before mapping characters Download characters cannot be remapped Mapped characters remain in effect until e Cleared with the Factory Reset option on the configuration menu or control command SOH AzX 150 Universal Control Commands e Overwritten by new selections e Anew emulatio
81. 05 m Not used Em 64 128 16 32 3 16 4 8 2 4 1 2 Not used 6998906 Not used Designing Ascending and Descending Characters ABO S1 156 Universal Control Commands EXTENDED CHARACTERS Use a matrix like the one shown below to design shaded characters like those typically assigned to data byte values 176 to 178 and 219 to 223 decimal and line drawing characters like those typically assigned to data byte values 179 to 218 decimal If a line draw character is selected the dots you enter in Row 8 are copied into Rows 10 11 and 12 If a shaded character is selected the dots you enter in Rows 6 7 and 8 are copied into Rows 10 11 and 12 Intercharacter Space Ascending 12345678910 1234 56789 10 077 e Notjus d eum 64 128 16 32 8 16 4 8 gt 4 1 2 Not used 00000 Not used Extended Characters ABO T1 Note Print shaded characters and line drawing characters at 6 Ipi line spacing to obtain the full effect of the extension Operators Guide 157 PRINT QUALITY There are two ways to define the print quality of downloaded characters e Design characters in a style that is between draft and NLQ print quality This is sometimes referred to as correspondence quality The printer automatically calculates draft and NLQ from downloaded character data e Design and download da
82. 1 e 7 5 pitch LM 1unu 102 e 8 33 pitch LM 1gnpg113 e 8 57 pitch LM 1unyw116 e 9 1 pitch LM 1uny123 e 10 0 pitch LM 1unp 136 e 12 0 pitch LM 1gnpg 163 198 Epson FX 100 Control Commands e 15 0 pitch LM 1 un p204 e 16 67 pitch LM 1 u n u 226 e 17 14 pitch LM 1 u n u 233 e 18 2 pitch LM 1 un p247 where LM is the setting for the left margin If n is greater that the upper limit the command is ignored and the previous right margin setting remains in effect ESC N Skip Over Perforation ASCII ESC N n Control cTRL N n Decimal 27 78 n Hexadecimal 1B 4E n Sets the bottom margin to n number of lines n must be from 1 to 127 When the form length is changed by using the Length of Form by Lines command ESC G or the Length of Form in Inches Command ESC C NUL the bottom margin setting is cancelled To regain the bottom margin setting use ESC N following either ESC C or ESC C NUL Example REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 55 LINES AND RESET REM BOTTOM MARGIN TO 3 LINES LPRINT CHR 27 C CHR 55 LPRINT CHR 27 N CHR 3 ESCO Cancel Skip Over Perforation ASCII ESC O Control cTRL O Decimal 27 79 Hexadecimal 1B 4F Cancels the bottom margin setting set with ESC N Operators Guide 199 MISCELLANEOUS ESC Printer Initialization ASCII ESC Control CTRL Decimal 27 64 Hexadecimal 1B 40 Initializes the printer This command
83. 1 and IBM 2 CO and C1 Other form lengths are available using emulation control commands The DEC LA210 emulation also contains a No Form mode selected by a control command A 6 Appendix A Specifications CHARACTERISTICS CONTINUED Character Sets continued Character Code Standard 96 Character ASCII Maps 96 Character Epson National Use including U S Japan France Norway Germany Denmark ll U K Spain Il Denmark Latin America Sweden Hebrew Italy Epson Italy ANSI Spain Code Page 437 U S Code Page 437 Hebrew Code Page 850 Multilingual Code Page 860 Portugal t All emulations support the standard ASCII character map Also adapts to an Epson National Use Standard Code Page using Epson control commands T All also adapt to an IBM All Character Character Set PC 8 using IBM control commands Operators Guide A 7 CHARACTERISTICS CONTINUED Character Sets continued DEC DEC National Use including Canada Italy ANSI Spain Finland Hebrew U K France Sweden U S Germany Norway Denmark DEC Multilingual DEC VT100 Line Draw Overlays OCR A OCR B Downloaded Characterstt Human Readable Fonts Text Characters Character NLQ 10 12 and 15 pitches only and Draft Modes 428 Printable Draft Characters 428 Printable NLQ Characters ROM Character Library includes Space Character Library Fixed Pitches 5 6 7 5 8 33 8 57 9 1 10 Pica 12 Elite 15 16 67 17 14 Char
84. 11 ESC 8w Select 8 33 Pitch 311 ESC 9w Select 9 1 Pitch 311 ESC n1 n2 s Set Print Area 295 ESC n s Left Margin 291 ESC n u Set Horizontal Tab at Current Column n 317 ESC n v Set Vertical TabatLinen 319 ESC w Select 10 0 Pitch 311 ESC n w Select Pitch 311 ESC z Set 6 Lines Per Inch 270 ESC n z Select Line Spacing 270 ESC String Terminator 302 ESC n Map G2 into Lower Data Bytes 286 ESC o Map G3 into Lower Data Bytes 287 ESC Map G3 into Upper Data Bytes 288 ESC Map G2 into Upper Data Bytes 287 ESC Map G1 into Upper Data Bytes 287 FF Form Feed 310 Command ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC 2742 41h 241 27h 27 n nja n d nje ons Function Disable Carriage Return Newline Unidirectional Printing Bidirectional Printing Enable Auto Wraparound Disable Auto Wraparound Set Active Column to Column n Advance n Columns Advance to Line n Advance n Lines Clear Horizontal Tab at Current Column Top Margin Left Margin Form Length Horizontal Tab Index Linefeed Next Line Horizontal Tab Set Vertical Tab Set Partial Line Down Map GO into Lower Data Bytes Map G1 into Lower Data Bytes Print Next Character from G2 Print Next Character from G3 String Terminator Vertical Tab Page 297 315 315 297 297 314 310 Operators Guide 265 4100 PRINTER VS DEC LA210 PRINTER A few difference e
85. 27 91 50 48 108 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 32 30 6C Does not change the active column when LF or VT is performed CR Carriage Return ASCII CR Control CTRL M Decimal 13 Hexadecimal OD Prints all data stored in the print buffer and sets the active column to the left margin If Auto Linefeed LF on CR is enabled a linefeed is performed If Carriage Return Newline is enabled a linefeed is performed after the carriage return Operators Guide 285 ESC 4Qh Enable Carriage Return Newline ASCII ESC 4 h Control CTRL 4 h Decimal 27 91 63 52 48 104 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3F 34 30 68 When a carriage return is performed the active column returns to the left margin and the paper advances one line ESC 4 Disable Carriage Return Newline ASCII ESC 4 l Control CTRL 4 I Decimal 27 91 63 52 48 108 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3F 34 30 6C When a carriage return is performed the active column returns to the left margin and the paper does not advance ESC 7h Enable Auto Wraparound ASCII ESC 7 h Control CTRL 7 h Decimal 27 91 63 55 104 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3F 37 68 Turns on Auto Wraparound mode Any characters received that would place the active column past the right margin are printed on the next line starting at the left margin Auto Wraparound mode remains in effect until control command ESC 7 lis received ESC 7 Disable
86. 3 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 32 67 ASCII ESC 3 g Control CTRL 3 g Decimal 27 91 51 103 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 33 67 Clears all previously set horizontal tabs All three control commands perform the same function Changing horizontal character pitch also changes the physical position of tab stops These commands only set or clear the tabs The Horizontal Tab control code HT causes the active column to advance to subsequent tab positions Selecting or cancelling font pitches changing the print quality to draft or NLQ or changing the print area also changes the physical position of the tabs 306 DEC LA210 Control Commands HTS Horizontal Tab Set ASCII HTS Control not applicable Decimal 136 Hexadecimal 88 Performs the same function as ESC H and ESC 1 Adds a horizontal tab at a column but not at a physical position on the page HTS is valid only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7 HT Horizontal Tab ASCII HT Control CTRL Decimal 9 Hexadecimal 09 Causes the active column to advance to the next horizontal tab position to the right of the current column If there are no tabs to the right of the current column the active column becomes the column after the right margin VTS Vertical Tab Set ASCII VTS Control not applicable Decimal 138 Hexadecimal
87. 3264 240 3264 288 3917 300 4080 360 4896 g1 through gx specify the pin fire patterns for each dot column The x in 9x refers to the maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved for the specified graphics density as shown above Eight of the 9 printhead pins are used to print graphics To calculate g1 through gx design each dot column as a cell that is 8 dot rows high then add the cell values vertically for each dot column The value of g for each column can be expressed as a decimal number the bits set to 1 correspond to the printhead pins that fire to create dots in each pattern If a bit is set the corresponding pin fires If it is not set the corresponding pin does not fire See the figure and example that follow 174 Universal Control Commands For example if g1219 decimal the corresponding binary expression is 0010011 The pins fire in the following pattern Cell Dot Values Column 128 O 19 00010011 64 32 O 16 o Ps 4 2 o 1 o The printer does not print until it receives sufficient data to fill all dot columns reserved for graphics Therefore if dot column space is reserved beyond the area in which printing occurs it must be filled with nulls decimal Os Operators Guide 175 The figure below shows how to determine the values for g1 gx to print an X shaped graphic pattern Dot Columns Cell vws 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 128 84 32
88. 36 52 44 8 33 160 176 168 7 5 34 50 42 6 0 33 35 49 51 41 43 5 0 32 48 40 Bold 29 30 31 61 62 63 60 184 58 57 59 56 Note Parameter value 13 decimal may not be successfully transmitted to the printer if sent using BASIC programming language Parameter value 26 decimal may not be successfully transmitted to the printer if sent using C programming language Operators Guide 145 SOHAZT Select Print Quality ASCII SOH A z T n Control CTRLA A Zz T n Decimal 1 65 122 84 n Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 54 n Selects draft or near letter quality NLQ printing n specifies the print quality as follows e n O draft e n 2 NLQ Note Near letter quality printing is available only in 10 12 and 15 pitch SOHAzL Enable Disable Barcode Printing ASCII SOH A z L n Control cTRLA A Zz L n Decimal 1 65 122 76 n Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 4C n Enables or disables the printing of barcode symbols For complete information on printing barcodes see Appendix E SOHAzM Set Barcode Parameters ASCII SOH A z M P1 P8 Control CTRLA A Z M P1 P8 Decimal 1 65 122 77 P1 P8 Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 4D P1 P8 Specifies the parameters used to print barcodes The function of each parameter is explained in Appendix E m can be for example decimal 2 or ASCII character 2 146 Universal Control Commands MAPPING CHARACTERS The commands in this subsection
89. 4100 PRINTER OPERATOR S GUIDE Part No 066 00428 02 Rev F ii Contents Operators Guide i Copyright 2000 Output Technology Corporation All rights reserved under the Berne Convention TRADEMARKS DEC LA210 is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Epson is a registered trademark of Epson America Inc Centronics is a registered trademark of Centronics Corporation IBM and Proprinter are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation Lotus is a registered trademark of Lotus Development Corporation Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Word are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Smart Cable is a registered trademark of Q Technology TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc WordPerfect is a registered trademark of WordPerfect Corporation Output Technology Corporation 2310 North Fancher Road Spokane WA 99212 1381 USA We suggest you use authorized service centers Contact us at Voice 509 536 0468 Fax 509 533 1280 For service please have your printer model and serial numbers handy these are located on the back of the printer Output Technology maintains a Bulletin Board System BBS service In the U S A call b09 533 1217 to access our BBS service for the very latest drivers firmware pricing maintenance and troubleshooting aids and application information Also you can contact us at FTP ftp output com public output WWW httpz www output com
90. 426 28 30 3234 3638 40 el Veles 1 3 5 7 9 11 1315 17 19 el valves 21 23 2527 2931 33 35 3739 Characters Sen als Characters Gel varies 128 Characters 128 ee Characters 64 128 64 VN 128 32 64 32 64 16 32 16 32 8 16 8 CN 16 4 8 4 LN 8 2 4 2 E 4 1 2 1a 2 1 i 1 Print Quality NLQ Download Character ABO V1 In calculating the 40 columns of data calculate the 10 columns of cell value data as you would for the correspondence character mentioned earlier that is calculate by adding up the ascender or descender cell values of corresponding cells with dots Then for the NLQ character include a zero value between each correspondence column value to create the 20 data bytes for the first NLQ pass For the second NLQ pass do the same but drop the leading column value and add a trailing zero value Operators Guide 159 For example for the 7 character above the calculated column values are as follows Correspondence Column Values 129 130 132 136 144 160 192000 NLQ 1st Pass column Values 129 0 1300 1320 136 0 1440 1600 1920000000 NLQ 2nd Pass Column Values 01300 1320 136 0 1440 1600 19200000000 160 X Universal Control Commands STORING DOWNLOAD CHARACTERS Download characters are stored in RAM temporary memory The character currently mapped to the same data byte value in ROM permanent memory is not overwritten Characters that have not bee
91. 4m Disable Underline ASCII ESC 2 4 m Control crR I 2 4 m Decimal 27 91 50 52 109 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 32 34 6D Cancels the underline function enabled with control command ESC 4 m or ESC 2 m ESC 2m Enable Underline ASCII ESC 2 m Control crR I 2 m Decimal 27 91 50 109 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 32 6D Selects the underline function All succeeding print characters are underlined until the function is disabled with control command ESC 24 m or ESC m ESC m Disable Underline ASCII ESC 2 m Control crR I m Decimal 27 91 48 109 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 30 6D Cancels the underline function enabled with control command ESC 4 m or ESC 2 m 302 DEC LA210 Control Commands SPECIAL PRINTHEAD MOVEMENT ESC n Set Active Column to Column n ASCII ESC n Control crR I n Decimal 27 91 n 96 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 60 Causes the next character to be printed in Column n The character following n is the grave accent see ASCII data byte value 96 decimal BS Backspace ASCII BS Control CTRL H Decimal 8 Hexadecimal 08 Causes the active column to move to the left one space If the active column is at the left margin the backspace command is ignored ESC n a Advance n Columns ASCII ESC n a Control CTRL n a Decimal 27 91 n 97 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 61 Advances the active column n number of
92. 5 4100 Printer VS DEC LA210 Printer esse 277 Unsupported DEC Commands sss 277 Character Pitch Differen CES aaa nana nenen eneve enen 279 Graphics Density Differences sssssessssssss 279 Character NDS sci e Ee E D EE 281 LIMES POM INGA nerisikointi A prexid EX phex1d Kroni k sti kroni oi i 290 Margins opta iat didum MR 291 Miscellaneous peer over sci bcs sti bet sedi r di el Do p D nb DO b DEREN 296 Gap TU 303 Paper Motion 2 ccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 308 Mc E 311 PINES IG ag isst sie ote ata rA AO Lost Lus cee Jase oases 312 Special Printhead Movement ssssssseeeesseee 314 Print Direction vese rit i isist it siri n sit hiri n n eti Ha ui id ido 315 TOS o E ce hat Oech Shen abet Sack Shek heh de Sock Suck Geek tesi eo e 316 Gel A 2 Throughput Ga en diedana A 2 Printing MGGRANIS Tis ocurrido iet ous DR acorn acnacenes A 2 gg c A 4 Pap r FCC em P EET A 4 RIBBON Gt thoi tno o ad oto E E A 6 Appendix A Specifications continued xviii Contents E melalons tn eR e RUE Character els os coast nade Montel ere duat bet on wate rats web ec Human Readable Fonts cccccccccccesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Barcode cash b rit esce ev Pere Ae d Cie EU Serial Intr T8 taii eate e dies exar Parallel InterfaC Ga nana aa aaaaannnan ane eee e
93. 57 9 1 10 0 12 0 15 0 12 0 17 14 18 2 ESC P Cancel Elite Pitch ASCII ESC P Control cTRL P Decimal 27 80 Hexadecimal 1B 50 Cancels elite pitches and selects pica pitches according to the table below Current character pitches of 5 0 8 33 8 57 10 0 16 67 and 17 14 are unaffected by this command Current Pitch After ESC P 6 0 5 0 9 1 8 33 12 0 10 0 15 0 10 0 18 2 16 67 Operators Guide 209 SO or ESC SO Enlarged Pitch ASCII SO Control CTRL N Decimal 14 Hexadecimal OE ASCII ESC SO Control CTRL CTRLN Decimal 27 14 Hexadecimal 1B OE Enlarges the currently selected pitch as follows Current Pitch After SO or ESC SO 18 2 9 1 17 14 8 57 16 67 8 33 15 0 7 5 12 0 6 0 10 0 5 0 See the BASIC example under DC4 SO causes the enlarged pitch to remain in effect for one line only or until one of the following is received e LF ESCW 0 SOHAz n e FF ESCW 48 ESC Az n e DC4 ESC n Note Enlarged pitch is called Double Wide Printing by some manufacturers This command is not valid when NLQ printing is selected 210 Epson FX 100 Control Commands DC4 Cancel Enlarged Pitch ASCII DC4 Control CTRL T Decimal 20 Hexadecimal 14 Cancels enlarged pitch set with command SO or ESC SO See the table below Pitch Set with SO or ESC SO After DC4 9 1 18 2 8 57 17 14 8 33 16 67 7 5 15 0 6 0 12 0 5 0 10 0 This command does not cancel enlarged pit
94. 63 decimal is sent a null column no dots is printed If a dot pattern above 126 decimal is sent a vertical line all dots is printed The following codes can be used within graphics mode to perform functions Performs a carriage return and linefeed Performs a carriage return without linefeed Initiates n repeats of the next dot column n may be any number from 0 to 65535 The next dot column is repeated n times When the count has run out any following dot columns are printed 294 DEC LA210 Control Commands Control codes sent while the printer is in graphics mode are processed or ignored as follows Processed without exiting graphics mode Ignored NUL EOT BS FF ENQ BEL LF HT DEL SI CR VT SO The printer remains in graphics mode until The power is turned off A valid C1 control code decimal range 128 and 159 is received A control command is received A string terminator ST or ESC Y is received The control code CAN is received When one of these events occurs all pending graphic data are printed out the printer exits graphics mode and the command is executed as normal Example Operators Guide 295 The following shows the command necessary to cause the printer to print an x shaped graphics pattern oo o o o e 33 18 12 12 18 39 t 66 63 63 6363 66 96 80 75 7581 96 di d6 QK QK OOOO REM PRINT X SHAPED PATTERN USING REM 200 DOTS INCH DENSITY GRAPHICS LPRINT
95. 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu and if control command ESC SP 7 has been received Otherwise the printer sets the MSB of data bytes received in the decimal range 128 to 159 to 0 effectively mapping them to CO decimal range 000 to 031 The position of the control codes is shown in these maps CO Control Codes C1 Control Codes HEX 0 1 HEX 8 9 0 NUL 0 NUL DCS 1 SOH DC1 1 2 2 3 DC3 3 4 4 IND 5 ENQ 5 NEL 6 6 7 BEL 7 8 BS CAN 8 HTS 9 HT 9 A LF A VTS B VT ESC B PLD CSI C FF C ST D CR D E SO E SS2 F SI F SS3 Operators Guide 289 ESCP1v Define Answer Back Message ASCII ESC P 1 h1 h30 Control CTRL P 1 V h1 h30 Decimal 27 80 49 118 h1 h30 Hexadecimal 1B 50 31 76 h1 h30 Enters an Answer Back Message string in permanent memory When control code ENQ is received the printer sends this Answer Back Message back to the host h1 through h30 are hexadecimal numbers representing characters of the Answer Back Message The message may contain up to 30 characters including spaces Additional characters are discarded If the message is less than 30 characters long use control sequence ESC or control code ST if the upper control codes are enabled to terminate the message Both printable characters and control characters can be
96. 81186 741202 90 218 106 234 122 250 B K k 44 172 60 188 76 204 92 220 108 236 124 252 D M m E gt N n 46 174 i APA E EAE A 47 175 63 191 79 207 95 223 111 239 127 255 1 1 o A Shown with 11 double boxed U S character substitutions See Page D 37 for other character substitutions Operator s Guide DEC MULTILINGUAL CHARACTER MAP 0 8 1 9 2 A 3 B 4 C 5 D 6 E 7 F SP A i t A N a 34 162 50 178 66 194 82 210 98 226 114 242 3 A a PME 36 164 52 180 68 196 84 212 100 228 116 244 37 165 53 181 69 197 85 213 101 229 117 245 38 166 54 182 70 198 86 214 102 230 118 246 39 167 55 183 71 199 87 215 103 231 119 247 ea ARS 401168 561184 721200 881216 104 232 120 248 1 T 42 170 58 186 74 202 90 218 106 234 122 250 43 171 59 187 75 203 91 219 107 235 123 251 Va i i 45 173 61 189 77 205 93 221 109 237 125 253 i i I B i D 31 D 32 Appendix D Character Sets DEC HEBREW CHARACTER MAP 0 8 1 9 2 A 3 B 4 C 5 D 6 E 7 F 32 160 48 176 64 192 80 208 96 224 112 240 33 161 49 177 65 193 81 209 97 225 113 241 34 162 50 178 66 194 82 210 98 226 114 242 35 163 51 179 67 195 83 211 99 227 115 243 36 164 52 180 68 196 84 212 100 228 116 244 37 165 53 181 69 197 85 213 101 229 117 245 38 166 54 182 70 198 86 214 102 230 118 246 39 167 55 183 71 199 87 215 103 231 119 247 40 168 56 184 72 200 88 216 104 232 120 248 41 169 57 185 73
97. 8Fh 19Fh LAFh 1BAh GHGS MoO aH PASHATMS Ft I HHLGAV LOES O 7 0123456789 25 GABCDEFGHI JKLMNO PQRSTUVWXYZENI4 _ abcdefghi jklmno parstuvwxy2 i A Cu daaaceeeiiiffd ezkooouuyduCfYP f aidbunnd9ornhi KY qit SHIKJJIAO JM 48aAARUBEITIYyb H CDYPbG9d4 951 695630 0087 xg Yo NAT n3ne 32320n 13007 Boat Ly Poy dt lt lh2355L 7AI lt gt ABCDEFGHIJK LMNOPARSTUVUXYZN 7 10123456789c5 ACENPSTVX Main Character Library Upright NLQ Characters JBO BH1 Operator s Guide D 11 THE CONTROL CODE MAP Speaking in graphic terms the first two columns in most character sets such as the one shown on Page D 6 contain control codes Below is an alphabetical list of abbreviations used in character sets in this appendix and in the CTRL CODE column of the data byte map Pages D 12 through D 15 show all possible emulation dependent control code maps You select the control code map using either Character Options in the configuration menu or emulation control commands NUL Null No Operation SYN Synchronous Idle SOHStart of Header ETB End of Transmission Block STX Start of Text CANCancel ETX End of Text EM End of Medium EOT End of Transmission SUB Substitute ENQ Enquiry ESC Escape ACK Acknowledge FS Field Separator BEL Bell GS Group Separator BS Back Space RS Record Separator HT Horizontal Tab US Unit Separator LF Line Feed IND Index VT Vertical Tab NEL Next Line FF Form Feed H
98. B 5B n 76 Add a vertical tab at Line n Vertical tabs are set at line numbers not physical locations on the page 5 Changing line spacing also changes the physical position of tab stops These commands only set or clear the tabs The vertical tab control code VT causes the active line to advance to subsequent tab positions 308 DEC LA210 Control Commands ESC n1 n2 n15 v Set Multiple Vertical Tabs ASCII ESC n1 n2 n15 v Control CTRL n1 n2 n15 v Decimal 27 91 n1 59 n2 59 n15 118 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n1 3B n2 3B n15 76 Adds multiple vertical tabs at Columns n1 n2 etc You may set up to a maximum of 15 vertical tabs with the use of one command Vertical tabs are set at line numbers not physical locations on the page ESC 4orESC 4g Clear All Vertical Tabstt ASCII ESC 4 Control cTRL 4 Decimal 27 52 Hexadecimal 1B 34 ASCII ESC 4 g Control cTRL 1 4 g Decimal 27 91 52 103 Hexadecimal 1B 5b 34 67 Clears all previously set vertical tabs Both control commands perform the same function VT Vertical Tab ASCII VT Control CTRLK Decimal 11 Hexadecimal 0B Causes the active line to advance to the next vertical tab on the current page If there are no more vertical tabs on the current page the active line is set at the top margin on the next page If Linefeed Newline mode is enabled the active column is als
99. Cin c PITT 184 Epson FX 100 Control Commands Index of Control Codes and Control Sequences 190 Alphabetical Summary epis vuni kta eint esent beer etre epe brisket 194 Unavailable Epson FX 100 Emulation Commands 195 Character Olson hn ae An eee Ac Lad 196 Form Length Sesterce RA E E E NM 199 Xvi Contents Epson FX 100 Control Commands continued GIADNICS P M M 201 LIne SPACING anten tel tet Be oun Sa su pa cl eek es 208 MAIN se 210 Miscellanea ee iet kren eto Ke iet exte dt ed 212 Print Direction 2 sinctestreicdatidisrltidistitedisriadbbiabiasesiarliddiatiatiarhes 217 Print Style seo etd a t 218 kaS aea a S N 229 IBM Proprinter XL Control Commands Index of Control Codes and Commands suse 234 Alphabetical Summary dreri enis ken nervit epe aden ded oed 237 Unavailable IBM Proprinter Control Commands 238 Character els xata iO a EYE Erb Exon FOR ope EIE 239 Form LORO st e ha E ea Ss 241 Graphie S e decedent Ss aide haat bs Stes op doo D bM On addict 243 im SS PACING MM Hn 247 cide sae er a DE mum 249 MISCEIIANCOUS san ann a DAR ma Momo Mna 251 PEHRBPBIEGOBOD serenata 255 PAAUSI O ea oe k ste dd d de dd ads dataset 256 N E Lo Mt M MM 265 DEC LA210 Control Commands Operators Guide xvii Index of Control Codes and Control Commands 234 Alphabetical SumMary need 27
100. Control CTRLI J n Decimal 27 74 n Hexadecimal 1B 4A n Sets line spacing at n 216 in The valid entries for n are 1 to 255 n 216 in line spacing is approximated using 1 144 in steps Maximum local and cumulative error is 1 216 in e ESC 3 n causes all subsequent line spacing to be set at n 216 e ESC J n prints all data in the print buffer clears the print buffer then advances the paper n 216 in one time only ESC J does not perform a carriage return with the linefeed Note n 216 in line spacing is called Graphics Line Spacing by some manufacturers Use a line spacing of 24 216 in for bit image graphics using eight bits Example REM Prints buffer amp advances paper 1 in LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 74 CHR 216 Operators Guide 197 ESC Set Left Margin ASCII ESC s n Control CTRL n Decimal 27 108 n Hexadecimal 1B 6C n Sets the left margin to column n The valid range for n is from 1 to one column less than the right margin setting The left margin is the first column in which characters is printed ESC Q Set Right Margin ASCII ESC Q n Control crRR Q n Decimal 27 81 n Hexadecimal 1B 51 n Sets the right margin to column n This command must be specified at the beginning of a line The value of n for the right margin depends on the setting of the left margin and the selected pitch e 5 0 pitch LIM 1gnpg68 e 6 0 pitch LM 1uny 8
101. DC3 Control CTRL S Decimal 19 Hexadecimal 13 07 Deselects printer when used with a serial interface Treated as a null on the parallel interface On the serial interface the printer sends this control code to indicate its buffer is full DC3 is the X OFF character See Appendix B for details regarding software handshaking Operators Guide 243 PRINT DIRECTION ESCU Unidirectional Bidirectional Printing ASCII ESC U Control CTRL U Decimal 27 85 Hexadecimal 1B 55 n n n n K Causes the printer to print unidirectionally or bidirectionally n indicates vvhich is selected as follovvs e n 1or49 Unidirectional printing e n 0Oor48 Bidirectional printing When unidirectional printing is selected data is printed only when the printhead is moving from left to right Printing this way improves vertical character alignment When bidirectional printing is selected data is printed when the printhead is moving in both directions This is the default print mode Note If set to ON PRINT STYLE Bi Directional Graphics 7 NLQ in the configuration menu overrides unidirectional printing 244 IBM Proprinter Control Commands PRINT STYLE Sl or ESC SI Condensed Pitch ASCII Sl Control CTRL 0 Decimal 15 Hexadecimal OF ASCII ESC Sl Control CTRL CTRLO Decimal 27 15 Hexadecimal 1B OF Increases character pitch according to the table
102. Data Byte Map Partial Printout Example JBO BA INTERFACE OPTIONS Pressing YES prints out the first of the interface options listed belovv e Active Interface e Serial Options e Input Buffer Size Active Interface Pressing YES prints out the active interface setting e Parallel factory default e Serial Whenever you change the active interface make sure that it matches the interface selection on the computer Do not forget to change cables and connect them to the proper connectors on the back of the printer and computer 60 Configuration Parallel Enables communication on the parallel interface connector on the back of the printer For information concerning parallel communications see Appendix C Serial Enables communication on the serial interface connector on the back of the printer For information concerning serial communications see Appendix B If you select Serial double check the serial interface settings under Serial Options the next configuration menu item Serial Options Pressing YES prints out the first of the serial options listed below e Protocol e DTR Polarity e Robust X ON e X OFF When Off Line e Baud e Data Bits e Parity e Stop Bits If the active interface is Serial then the settings for serial options must match those of the computer Operators Guide 61 Protocol Pressing YES prints out the present protocol setting e DTR X ON X OFF factory default e DT
103. F on CR to Returns On Paper Does not Feed Switch Panel or Electronics Call for service When Using Switch Failure Panel Paper Does not Feed Paper Supply Not 1 Align paper supply so it is in Reliably Positioned Correctly line with the paper feed Paper Stretched Too tractors Tight Release tension on paper by moving right tractor slightly closer to left tractor Paper hanging up on Make sure front feed path is front of stand or table unobstructed Prefer the during front feed bottom feed path Paper Hanging Up on Trim box as shown below or Paper Box remove paper from box Frequent Tears and or Paper Jams ABO J 5 Paper Too Heavy or 5 Consider using the bottom Light for Front Feed feed path Path Operators Guide 117 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONTINUED Paper Problems Positioning Feeding Paper Out Jamming continued Paper Does not Feed Obstruction 1 Check paper path for Both On and Off Line Mechanical or obstruction Electronics Failure Call for service Top of Form Ignored or Wrong Form Length Check the Form Length Paper Slews to Wrong Setting setting Page 77 in the TOF Setting configuration menu Host Changing Forms Check print driver settings of Settings host software If necessary use hex dump mode Page 132 to check control codes Electronic Failure sent by host 3 Call for service Self Test or Menu Switch Panel or Electronics Call for service
104. HR 1 AzM CHR 14 CHR 0 CHR 0 LPRINT CHR 1 CHR 3 CHR 1 CHR 3 CHR 1 START BARCODE COMMAND All data sent to the printer following the Start Barcode command are printed as barcode symbols The sole exception is the End Barcode command Either of two versions of the Start Barcode command can be used ASCII SOH A Z L 1 Control CTRL A A Z L 1 Decimal 1 65 122 76 49 Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 4C 31 or ASCII SOH A Z L 2 Control CTRL A A Z L 2 Decimal 1 65 122 76 50 Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 4C 32 Note The 1 and 2 in the Start Barcode command can be entered either as the character 1 or 2 as shown or as the decimal value 1 or 2 E 10 Appendix E Barcodes e SOH AzL1 enables barcode printing and honors line feeds SOH AzL1 is commonly used where vertical paper motion is controlled with form feeds e SOH AzL2 enables barcode printing and discards line feeds SOH AzL2 is commonly used where vertical paper motion is controlled with line feeds only In an application such as a report program generator SOH AzL2 preserves the RPG s expected positions of page endings and headers Both commands perform the same function with the following difference SOH AzL2 calculates the number of lines required to print the barcode symbol and human readable line if any then calculates the comparable number of line feeds at the line spacing in use prior to the start of barcode printing and then eliminates that number of line
105. HR 255 NEXT J LPRINT NEXT I END Operators Guide 193 ESCZ Quad Density Graphics ASCII ESC Z n1 n2 d1 d3264 Control cTRL Z n1 n2 d1 d3264 Decimal 27 90 n1 n2 d1 d3264 Hexadecimal 1B 5A n1 n2 d1 d3264 Causes the printer to print quadruple density graphics Quadruple density graphics are printed in synthesized 240 dot columns per horizontal in The maximum number of dot columns that can be reserved per line in quad density graphics is 3264 The printer prints half as many dot columns as it receives Adjacent columns are paired and if corresponding bits in either dot column are set a pin is fired to create a dot Example REM PRINT 2 SOLID BARS 150 DOT PATTERNS IN REM LENGTH USING QUAD DENSITY GRAPHICS FORI 1TO2 LPRINT CHR 27 Z CHR 150 CHR 0 FOR J 1 TO 150 LPRINT CHR 255 NEXT J LPRINT NEXT I END 194 Epson FX 100 Control Commands ESC Graphics Mode Selection ASCII ESC m n1 n2 d1 dx Control CTRL m n1 n2 d1 dx Decimal 27 42 m n1 n2 d1 dx Hexadecimal 1B 2A m n1 n2 d1 dx Causes the printer to print graphics in the density specified by m as follows 0 Single Density 60 dots in 1 Double Density 120 dots in 2 High Speed Double Density 120 dots in 3 Quad Density 240 dots in 4 75 dots in 5 50 dots in 6 75 dots in The x in dx refers to the maximum
106. IGg Clear Horizontal Tab at Current Column ASCII ESC g Control CTRL g Decimal 27 91 103 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 67 ASCII ESC g Control CTRL g Decimal 27 91 48 103 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 30 67 Clears horizontal tab at current column Both control commands perform the same function 3 Changing horizontal character pitch also changes the physical position of tab stops These commands only set or clear the tabs The Horizontal Tab control code HT causes the active column to advance to subsequent tab positions Selecting or cancelling font pitches changing the print quality to draft or NLQ or changing the print area also changes the physical position of the tabs Operators Guide 305 ESC n u Set Horizontal Tab at Column n4 ASCII ESC n u Control CTRL n u Decimal 27 91 n 117 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 75 Adds a horizontal tab at Column n ESC n1 n2 n16 u Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs ASCII ESC n1 5 n2 5 n16 u Control CTRL n1 n2 n16 u Decimal 27 91 n1 59 n2 59 n16 117 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n1 3B n2 3B n16 75 Adds multiple horizontal tabs at Columns n1 n2 etc A maximum of 16 horizontal tabs may be set with one command ESC20rESC 2gor ESC 3g Clear All Horizontal Tabs ASCII ESC 2 Control CTRL 2 Decimal 27 50 Hexadecimal 1B 32 ASCII ESC 2 g Control crR I 2 g Decimal 27 91 50 10
107. INT CHR 20 LPRINT Now printing in 10 cpi again LPRINT CHR 13 248 IBM Proprinter Control Commands ESCW Set Cancel Enlarged Pitch ASCII ESC VV n Control cTRL W n Decimal 27 87 n Hexadecimal 1B 57 n Sets and cancels enlarged pitch n specifies whether the function is set or cancelled e n 1or49 Setenlarged pitch e n 0or48 Cancel enlarged pitch Setting enlarged pitch causes the currently selected pitch to become enlarged as follows Current After ESC Previous After ESC W Pitch W 1 Pitch 0 18 2 9 1 9 1 18 2 17 14 8 57 8 57 17 14 16 67 8 33 8 33 16 67 15 0 7 5 7 5 15 0 12 0 6 0 6 0 12 0 10 0 5 0 5 0 10 0 ESC W 1 or ESC W 49 causes enlarged pitch to remain in effect until changed by one of the following e ESCW 0 ESCAz n e ESCW 48 SOHAz n Note Enlarged pitch is called Double Wide Printing by some manufacturers This command is not valid when NLQ printing is selected Operators Guide 249 Example REM SET ENLARGED PITCH LPRINT CHR 27 W CHR 1 This is large REM CANCEL ENLARGED PITCH LPRINT CHR 27 W CHR 0 This is small ESC Set 12 Pitch ASCII ESC Control CTRL Decimal 27 58 Hexadecimal 1B 3A Sets character pitch to 12 pitch If currently printing in Enlarged Pitch sets to 6 pitch Control code DC2 resets to 10 pitch Current Pitch After ESC 18 2 12 0 17 14 12 0 16 67 12 0 15 0 12 0 10 0 12 0 9 1 6
108. L BLH NUM Set b d 8 KUL MUL NUL NUL IND MEL NUL MUL HTS NUL TE FLD NUL NUL 553 DCS NUL MUL MUL MUL NUL NUL NUL NUL MUL NUL CSI ST NUL NUL NUL Operator s Guide 3i amp Printout of DEC U S Multilingual Character Set Factory Default for DEC Emulation 39 JB0 AO 40 Operations Hexadecimal To Decimal Conversion Along with U S PC 8 computer terminal characters 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ja SP 0 E P p 16 32 48 64 80 112 w m e ka 7 s gt q 17 113 eE oe eS aes id nd oa pja 9 P TET P T 1 2 2 i M its 18 4 i B S ki g w 23 1 o3 119 HERR B g j j j j cj x f is 5 27 w E HHERHHHIPEMS 108 121 a 124 125 PE Operators Guide 41 Hexadecimal To Decimal Conversion continued e 160 208 224 177 193 209 225 o a 162 178 194 210 147 163 179 195 211 227 148 164 180 196 212 228 149 165 181 197 213 229 151 167 183 199 215 231 152 168 184 200 216 232 153 169 185 201 217 233 a E i 171 187 203 219 235 172 188 204 220 173 189 205 221 M 142 158 190 2 s 159 191 207 42 Operations What Is a Character Set A character set consists of up to 256 printable patterns and printer instructions assigned to 256 possible codes The character set tells the printer what to do or wh
109. ON LINE is pressed the beeper sounds When on line printer can print data received from the computer When off line you can set top of form move paper or change configuration Also use this key to exit the configuration menu The ON LINE indicator flashes when the operator door is open NLQ Ll NEXT B YES Operator s Guide Top Of Form NLQ NEXT Key With printer off line press to set top of form See Setting Top of Form Page 30 Printer beeps once when top of form is set Press along with ON LINE to switch between near letter quality NLQ and draft modes Also use this key to move through the configuration menu See Navigating the Configuration Menu Page 51 Line Feed YES Key With printer off line press once to advance paper one line Hold pressed to advance multiple lines Also used in micro positioning the paper See On Line Hot Keys Page 12 Also use this key to choose configuration menu options See Navigating the Configuration Menu Page 51 9 10 Basics press once to eject a page that is to print anything still in the output line buffer if BACK applicable and then to advance paper to the top of the next form Hold pressed to move paper continuously Also used in micro positioning the paper See On Line Hot Keys Page 12 Form Feed BACK Key With printer off line aL Also use this key to move through the configuration menu See Navigating th
110. PRINT 278 DECLA210 Control Commands LINES PER INCH ESC n z Set Line Spacing ASCII ESC I n Z Control crR I n Z Decimal 27 91 n 122 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 7A Sets the number of lines to be printed on each vertical inch also called vertical pitch n specifies the line spacing as follows Lines Per Inch 2 3 4 6 6 8 12 Value of n ASCII 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 Decimal 52 53 54 48 49 bO 51 Hexadecimal 34 35 36 30 31 32 33 6 lines per in line spacing may also be set using ESC I z without sending parameter n When the lines per inch setting is changed the active line moves down after the next vertical paper motion command to the next even multiple of the new vertical pitch The physical positions of the vertical tabs are also altered Changing lines per inch does not reset the top or bottom margin Operators Guide 279 MARGINS ESC n sor ESC n Os Left Margin ASCII ESC n S Control CTRL n S Decimal 27 91 n 115 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 73 ASCII ESC n S Control CTRL n S Decimal 27 91 n 59 48 115 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 3B 30 738 Sets the left margin to Column n The left margin is the first column in which characters are printed The valid range for n is from 1 to one column less than the right margin setting Both control commands perform the same function ESC n sor ESC n s Right Margin ASCII ESC n S C
111. Parallel Interface Signal Pin and Signal Name Description Direction DATA 7 RET DATA 8 RET ACKNLG RET BUSY RET PAPER OUT RET INIT A low pulse of at least 100 ms low sensitivity or 1 66 ms high sensitivity resets the printer to its initial power on state and clears the buffer Signal is normally high No connections No connections No connections Parallel Interface Pin Assignments continued Operators Guide C 7 PARALLEL INTERFACE TIMING The illustration that follows shows the sequence for parallel data transmission DATA 1 through DATA 8 oto E STROBE aS BUSY e Ls estere eet ACKNLG Ada Parallel Interface Timing ABO AR 1 Data set up time 1 us minimum STROBE pulse width 1 us minimum Data hold time 1 uis minimum STROBE to BUSY delay 100 ns typical BUSY length variable 35 us typical BUSY negation to ACKNLG delay 100 ns typical ACKNLG pulse width 5 us ACKNLG assertion to STROBE delay 2 us minimum oN OO F Q N C 8 Appendix C Parallel Interface INTERFACE CIRCUITS T5v 7418573 210K 2 D Q D 100pF Data Line Receivers 5v gt 74LS541 cu uA g es E i I 00pF f Control Line Receivers T5v 74LS541 lt 10k ANSY lt 100pF Control Line Drivers JBO BQ2 Appendix D Character Sets This appendix is concerned primarily with standard character sets creat
112. Printout Occurs Without Failure Being Selected No Response to Keys Power Problem Perform a Power Up Sequence Power On but POWER Test Page 131 is Not Lit No Response to Keys Switch Panel or Electronics Call for service POWER is Lit Failure Paper Does not Feed Switch Panel or Electronics Call for service When Using Switch Failure Panel 118 Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONTINUED Character or Control Printer s Menu Settings Normal Host computer Problems With Any Have Been Superseded commands override printer Interface by Host configuration settings for print style characters set and forms control These printer configuration settings are only effective until the host changes the settings using printer control commands Printer Off or Off line Check Blown Fuse Replace fuse Page 107 Electronics Failure Call for service Problems When Using Wrong Serial Interface Host and printer settings for Serial Interface Only Settings baud data bits parity and Garbled text with stop bits must be the same numerous Check Serial Options Page 64 in printer s configuration mode characters Loose or Bad Interface Cable Check If necessary replace Bad Data interface cable No printout Printer prints a few pages and quits Check data using hex dump mode Page 132 Call for service Electronics Failure Operators Guide 119 TROUBLESHOOTING CHA
113. R e X ON X OFF e ETX ACK Protocol refers to the handshaking technique used for serial communication For more information concerning hardware and software handshaking techniques see Appendix B DTR X ON X OFF Combines hardware handshaking using the DTR signal with software handshaking using X ON X OFF DTR Stands for data terminal ready The printer sets the DTR signal high when it is ready to receive data from the computer DTR is hardware oriented handshaking initiated by the printer X ON X OFF Stands for Transmission On Transmission Off The printer sends the X ON status using device control code 1 DC1 to the computer when it is ready to receive data The X OFF status using DC3 is sent when the printer is busy receiving and processing data Also see Robust X ON and X OFF When Off Line the next configuration menu items X ON X OFF is software oriented handshaking initiated by the printer ETX ACK Stands for End of Text Acknowledge The computer sends the ETX code to the printer after each line of characters The computer waits for the ACK code from the printer before sending the next line of characters ETX ACK is software oriented handshaking initiated by the computer 62 Configuration DTR Polarity Pressing YES prints out the present setting e High factory default e Low See Hardware Handshaking in Appendix B Robust X ON Pressing YES prints out the present setting e Off e On fact
114. RT CONTINUED Communications continued Problems When Using Loose or Bad Interface 1 Check If necessary replace Parallel Interface Only Cable interface cable Bad Data 2 Check data using hex dump mode Page 132 Electronics Failure 3 Call for service Printheads Click Printhead Electronics Call for service Just When Printer is Failure Turned Off Carriage Speed Too Obstruction Check for and remove any Slow material impeding carriage Belt Tension Too Tight Call for service or Loose Bad Carriage Bearing or Electronics Failure Printhead Snags Ribbon Worn Ribbon Replace ribbon Page 100 Printhead or Electronics Call for service Failure If accompanied by beeping see BEEPS The sound of a printhead hammer or hammers striking paper 120 Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS POWER UP SEQUENCE TEST The normal start up sequence for the printer is detailed in the following table The printer performs this sequence each time the printer is turned on After Turning On Printer Meaning That If Not Observed Observe the Following A Indicators light Power is applied to Check power receptacle briefly printer Main power power cable and printer POWER supply is operating OK fuses Page 107 If indicator and feeding power to necessary call for remains on switch panel service B Printhead Carriage motor functions Check for an obstruction carriage properly
115. SCL ESC N ESC O ESC Q 22 ESC R ESC S ESC SI ESC SO ESC T ESC U ESC W ESC X ESC Y ESCZ ESC ESC Operator s Guide Function Set NLQ Cancel NLQ Set Cancel NLQ n 216 Inch Line Spacing Single Density Graphics Double Density Graphics Skip Over Perforation Cancel Skip Over Perforation Deselect Printer Set Tabs to Power On Settings Set Subscript Superscript Condensed Pitch Enlarged Pitch Cancel Subscript Superscript Unidirectional Bidirectional Printing Set Cancel Enlarged Pitch Set Horizontal Margins Double Density Graphics Quad Density Graphics All Characters Character Set Next Character From All Characters Set Form Feed Horizontal Tab Linefeed Condensed Pitch Enlarged Pitch Vertical Tab 225 228 254 226 IBM Proprinter Control Commands UNAVAILABLE IBM PROPRINTER CONTROL COMMANDS The following commands are not available in IBM emulation mode ESC ESC ESC _ ESC P Downloaded Character Font Double High Double Wide Printing Continuous Overscore Proportional Printing The IBM Download Character Font command ESC can be performed by the equivalent universal control command SOH Az amp Operators Guide 227 CHARACTER SETS ESC 6 Select IBM Character Set 2 ASCII ESC 6 Control CTRL 6 Decimal 27 54 Hexadecimal 1B 36 This command causes the printer to print with the IBM Character Set 2 See Appendix D for charts of character sets
116. Standard ASCII Control Code Map is shaded Standard ASCII Character Code Map is unshaded Operator s Guide D 7 8 9 A B C D E F 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 0 PAH 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 242 EM 131 147 163 179 195 211 221 243 EM 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252 ser fe sia seo cos os ay be 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 LE iss vis io w mem 142 158 174 190 206 222 2 7 254 38 SI US O P o DEL 143 159 iss i 20 223 239 255 D 8 Appendix D Character Sets Custom Substitutions Standard Character Map Standard Modified Character Character Set Set Standard i Control Code Map OCRA Downloaded OCR B Characters Characters Characters Custom Characters from Host JBO BF Note Except for custom substitutions from the ROM character library all mapping is done using either Character Options in the configuration menu or control commands Custom substitutions from the ROM character library can only be done using universal control commands Emulation dependent Custom characters from the host are downloaded using universal control commands Custom substitutions from the ROM
117. T City State 99212 1381 LPRINT CHR 27 I CHR 56 LPRINT CHR 1 AzL1 LPRINT 99212 1381 10 LPRINT CHR 1 AzL O Note The printer imposes no limit on the number of barcode digits Operator s Guide E 15 Ist digit of PostNet barcode must be placed within shaded area NY 3 16 min V 7 16 max m 4 S PostNet Placement on a Standard Business Envelope ABO AB CHECK DIGITS The check digit is optional for Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 and Codabar if desired the check digit should be supplied as part of the data according to the specifications of the code you are using EAN 8 barcodes do not use check digits The check digit for UPC E and PostNet barcodes are automatically calculated and appended by the printer For UPC A and EAN 13 barcodes a check digit is required but it is not automatically calculated and appended by the printer The last character is used as the check digit See the table below E 16 Appendix E Barcodes Printer Check Digit Calculates and Check Digit No Check Required Appends Check Optional Digit Digit Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 PostNet The check digit prints out along with all other barcode characters in the human readable line NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTERS AND COUNTRY FLAGS The first character in UPC barcodes and the first two characters in EAN 13 barcodes are for symbol identification The first dig
118. TS Horizontal Tabulation Set CR Carriage Return VTS Vertical Tab Set SO Shift Out PLD Partial Line Down SI Shift In SS2 Single Shift 2 DLE Data Link Escape SS3 Single Shift 3 DC1 Device Control 1 X ON DCS Device Control String DC2 Device Control 2 CSI Control Sequence Introducer DC3 Device Control 3 X OFF ST String Terminator DCA Device Control 4 DEL Delete Rub Out NAK Negative Acknowledge In the control code maps that follow the number below the control code abbreviations is the decimal equivalent of the hexadecimal column row value Technically not actually a control code D 12 Appendix D Character Sets EPSON CONTROL CODE MAP 0 8 1 9 o N co OI as B Control Code Map for Epson Character Set N N N To 5 3 mje o ESC 27 pergj sja Qje T N oo Characters can be mapped to unshaded areas Operators Guide D 13 IBM CONTROL CODE MAPS 0 8 1 9 iad E 0 128 16 144 0 16 i 1 129 17 145 1 17 2 130 18 146 2 18 DC3 3 DC3 3 131 19 147 DC4 Control Code 4 4 132 20 148 Map for Lower and Upper Halves 5 5 133 21 149 of IBM 1 Character Sets 6 Control Code Map for Lower Half of IBM 2 Character Sets 6 134 22 150 BEL 7 7135 23 151 BS CAN 8 8 136 24 152 HT 9 9 137 25 153 LF A 10 138 26 154 VT ESC B 11 139 27 155 FF C 12 140 CR D SO E De suse 7 15 43 31 159 Characters can be mapped to unshade
119. The Clorox Company Operators Guide 93 CHANGING RIBBON CARTRIDGE Important For best results and longest printer life insist on genuine factory approved ribbon cartridges Re inked or remanufactured ribbon cartridges are not suitable Obtain factory approved ribbon cartridges from your dealer or directly from the printer manufacturer See the front of this operator s guide for information on ordering ribbon cartridges Replace the ribbon cartridge if it becomes frayed or the print density is too light Replace with a genuine factory approved ribbon cartridge Refer to the following illustration for removing and installing a ribbon cartridge Platen Ribbon Guide Warning Hot i Td d Printhead T P d Carriage p Z ST N SS ee I L Directio n TI ifi Pa L d y oaan of Ribbon f M eariridge oS Travel ANI F4 _ jaa i I yj x T aa ar TR Ribbon Feed Wheel LN Platen Adjustment Lever p s Left amp Right Tabs Ribbon Cartridge Top View of Operator Access JBO AP To remove a ribbon cartridge proceed as follovvs Warning After printing printheads are hot 94 Maintenance Note You need not remove paper to change the ribbon cartridge 5 6 Turn off the printer or place printer off line Open the operator access door Move the printhead carriage to the center of the printer Move the printhead gap adjustment l
120. The maximum number of dot columns per line for single density graphics is 816 n1 and n2 are calculated as follows ni X MOD 256 n2 INT X 256 where X equals the number of dot columns to reserve For example if the number of dot columns is 80 n1 80 MOD 256 80 n2 INT 80 256 0 d1 d816 are decimal numbers from 0 to 255 each representing a dot column Each decimal number has a corresponding 8 bit binary expression The bits set to logic 1 in the binary expression correspond to the printhead pins that fire to create dots in each dot column If a bit is set the corresponding pin fires If it is not set the corresponding pin does not fire See the figures and examples of single density graphics in the Epson FX 100 Control Command section 232 IBM Proprinter Control Commands ESC L or ESC Y Double Density Graphics ASCII ESC L n1 n2 d1 d1632 Control crR L n1 n2 d1 d1632 Decimal 27 76 n1 n2 d1 d1632 Hexadecimal 1B 4C n1 n2 d1 d1632 ASCII ESC Y n1 n2 d1 d1632 Contro crTR Y n1 n2 d1 d1632 Decimal 27 89 n1 n2 d1 d1632 Hexadecimal 1B 59 n1 n2 d1 d1632 Causes the printer to print double density graphics Double density graphics are printed 120 dot columns per horizontal in The following illustrates the difference between single density and double density graphics Single Density FR Double Density FEN ra
121. WLEDGMENT character ACK back to the computer ETX is ASCII character decimal number 3 and ACK is ASCII character decimal number 6 B 16 Appendix B Serial Interface HARDWARE HANDSHAKING Hardware handshaking controls data transmission by changing the voltage level on a signal wire Not all printers can respond to control characters embedded in the data stream software handshaking Many printers use a pin on the connector to specify a buffer full condition When the printer asserts its buffer full line data transmission stops The printer supports two hardware handshaking protocols e DTR e BUSY Inverse DTR DTR DTR handshaking protocol uses the DTR signal on Pin 20 The voltage remains high until the print buffer is 256 bytes from full at which time DTR is set low When the buffer is 2256 bytes from full 257 bytes if minimum buffer size is selected in the configuration menu DTR resets to high and data transmission can resume BUSY Inverse DTR DTR is specified for Pin 20 of an RS 232 C serial interface Used according to RS 232 C specifications DTR is high when the printer is ready to receive new print data and low when it is busy processing print data On the 4100 printer DTR on Pin 20 is also wired to Pins 11 and 19 Some computer operating systems expect a signal called BUSY or inverse DTR on either Pin 11 or 19 in place of DTR If used BUSY is low when the printer is ready to receive new print data
122. While tracking If necessary call for moves right to the printer checks service left then stops position of the printhead at extreme carriage and then parks left the carriage at its home position in preparation for printing Operators Guide 121 POWER UP SEQUENCE TEST CONTINUED After Turning On Printer Meaning That If Not Observed Observe the Following C Printer chirps Printer is mechanically Call for service and electronically OK A manual off line on line cycle also causes this chirp D ON LINE Printer is ready for If ON LINE does not light indicator operation check for paper out lights paper jam printhead carriage obstruction If it flashes close the operator access door If necessary call for service HEX DUMP MODE The hexadecimal hex dump mode is used for checking e Proper receipt of characters by the printer e Control commands e Nonprintable codes 122 Troubleshooting To enter the hex dump mode do one of the following e Press and hold LINE FEED and FORM FEED and then turn on printer to place printer in 10 pitch hex dump mode The printer prints all transmissions from the host in hex dump format on 13 6 in lines e Press and hold ON LINE LINE FEED and FORM FEED and then turn on printer to place printer in 17 14 pitch hex dump mode The printer prints all transmissions from the host in hex dump format on 8 in lines A hex dump shows both the hexadecimal
123. Y SEQUENCES TO SEND COMMANDS Commands composed of a single control code may be sent using a control key sequence corresponding to the assigned data byte Where control key sequence formats are shown in this manual CTRL represents the control key on the computer keyboard not individual characters to be typed Control key sequences for example CTRL A are sent by pressing the control key CTRL together with the key for the specified character If CTRL does not appear before a character within the sequence the key for that character is pressed alone The table below shows ASCII control codes assigned to data bytes 0 through 31 decimal and the corresponding control key sequence Operators Guide 133 Decimal Hexadecimal ASCII Control Key Value Value Name Sequence o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 134 Universal Control Commands TYPOGRAPHIC CONVENTIONS This subsection describes the typographic conventions used in descriptions of control codes and control commands throughout this manual FORMAT Spaces are never sent to the printer as part of the command For readability the arguments of the command are shown separated by spaces Character case is significant For example if R is shown as part of the command an uppercase R must be sent The format for entering each control code or control command is shown as follows ASCII the sequence in ASCII character Control the sequence in control characters Decimal the sequence
124. acter library map and the character number map DECENDERS That part of a character that falls below the character s baseline Also a term used to describe a subscript character DECIMAL The numbering system that uses the numerals 0 to 9 DEFAULT A value or setting that is used if no alternate setting is specified Default settings are in effect when the printer is turned on or reset DOWNLOAD To send data from the computer to the printer DTR Data Terminal Ready DTR is a hardware handshaking protocol in which a receiving device controls data flow by changing the voltage level on a signal wire ERASEABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY EPROM A specific type of ROM The printer uses a 128K x 8 bit EPROM for storing the software that has been electronically programmed into this ROM device A programmed EPROM is sometimes referred to as firmware G 4 Glossary FACTORY DEFAULT A default assigned at the factory FORM The area of paper defined between top of form positions FORM FEED A control key on the printer switch panel and a control code used to advance the paper to the top of the next form FORMS OPTIONS Used to select the appearance of the printed form Accessed from the printer switch panel or by sending control commands from the computer HANDSHAKING The exchange of signals or characters between connected devices to control data flow and prevent data loss See DTR and X ON X OFF HEXADECIMAL A numbering
125. acters In Pica Condensed 18 2 Elite Condensed Typeface Nonproportional typewriter face and OCR Typestyle Upright Italics Condensed Enlarged tt Download characters for overlaying using universal control commands A 8 Appendix A Specifications CHARACTERISTICS CONTINUED Human Readable Fonts continued Weight Normal Stroke Emphasized Bold Download Supported Characters Text Composition Dot Configuration Dot Size Char Graphics Dia Draft 9x7 9x12 1 100 in ROM Resident 9x7 9x12 1 120 in 9x7 9x12 1 150 in 9x7 9x12 1 166 in 9x7 9x12 1 182 in NLQ 18x14 18x24 1 200 in ROM Resident 18x14 18x24 1 240 in 18x14 18x24 1 300 in Download Draft 1 120 in Download NLQ 1 240 in Barcodes Styles Code 3 of 9 EAN 8 EAN 13 UPC A UPC E Interleaved 2 of 5 PostNet Codabar Height 1 12 in to 10 in in 1 12 in increments Bar Width 0 014 in min Operator s Guide A 9 CHARACTERISTICS CONTINUED Barcodes continued Space Width Intercharacter Gap Weight Density Graphics Technique Graphic Resolution Serial Interface Type Protocol Baud Data Bits Parity Stop 0 014 in min 0 014 in min Single and Double Strike 75 and 100 dpi Bit image dot addressable Single Density 1 60 in dia Double Density 1 120 in dia Quadruple Density 1 240 in dia RS 232 C RS 422 A optional DTR X ON X OFF or ETX ACK 1200 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 7 ors E
126. ad carriage motor in effect shortening their life span 28 Operations RUNNING A SELF TEST Warning If you run self test with the operator access door open make sure no article of clothing necktie jewelry is hanging into the operator access While pressing LINE FEED turn on printer to begin a rolling 2 printout of keyboard characters YES IS To stop printout press ON LINE or turn off the printer Note As a safety feature when using fast pitch 10 pitch printing the printer prints at half speed if the operator access door is open To temporarily cancel half speed printing during a self test press and hold TOF while the printer prints Self Test Printout JBO AI Operators Guide 29 SETTING TOP OF FORM Note The configuration menu option for form length must be set correctly before setting the top of form The factory default form length is 11 in usually set to correspond to 11 in between horizontal perforations If necessary see Form Length Page 77 in the Configuration section to select a different length 1 Use the paper positioning keys to move the paper to the desired top of form position Paper Position Keys Paper Movement With Printer Up 1 Line LF Off Line YES j TE LF Up by 1 144 in EXIT NES u ON LINE FF EXIT BACK Down by 1 144 in 30 Operations Normally the horizontal perforation is chosen as the top of form For this move the paper so that the horizontal perfor
127. age An IBM Proprinter XL printer contains two variations of IBM character sets IBM 1 and IBM 2 Although only one character set can be the IBM default character set you can assign a code page default for each of them Code pages is the term IBM uses to refer to its national use character maps Operators Guide 81 IBM Control Code Map Pressing YES prints out the present IBM control code map selection e IBM 1 factory default e IBM 2 IBM 1 The U S IBM 1 Character Set IBM 1 control code map U S national use character map is shown on Page 41 Instead of the U S national use character map IBM calls this Code Page 437 you can select the multilingual or Portuguese character map under IBM 1 Code Page in the next subsection IBM 2 The U S IBM 2 Character Set is similar to the one shown on Page 41 except that Columns 8 and 9 contain characters rather than control codes Instead of the U S national use character map you can select the multilingual Portuguese or Hebrew character map under IBM 2 Code Page Page 86 IBM 1 Code Page Pressing YES prints out the present IBM emulation code page selection for the IBM 1 character set e Code Page 437 U S factory default e Code Page 850 Multilingual e Code Page 860 Portugal For more information on IBM code pages see Appendix D 82 Configuration IBM 2 Code Page Pressing YES prints out the present IBM emulation code page selection fo
128. ality well shielded interface cable Both connectors should be metal and connected to chassis frame ground Make sure the power is OFF anytime you are connecting or disconnecting the power cable or interface cable Be sure the cover is secure while the printer is running vi Contents SUPPLIES AND SERVICES Important For best results and longest printer life insist on genuine factory approved ribbon cartridges Re inked or remanufactured ribbon cartridges are not suitable Obtain factory approved ribbon cartridges from your dealer or directly from the printer manufacturer Output Technology Corporation 2310 North Fancher Road Spokane WA 99212 1381 Voice 1 800 468 8788 Fax 509 533 1280 Genuine factory approved ribbon cartridges are your best price performance value Factory approved ribbon cartridges are manufactured to close tolerances under exacting quality control to provide long life reliability and uniformity Order your ribbons fast Tear out and use the handy fax form following Page viii If you need service contact us for the name of the nearest certified service agent Please have your printer model and serial numbers handy these are located on the back of the printer When you call ask about our Factory Express Service Program Operators Guide vii FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15
129. allel interface The direction of the arrow indicates whether the signal is an input to the printer or output gt from the printer A twisted pair cable is often used for each signal in the interface and the connection must be completed on the signal return side To prevent noise use cables that are shielded and connect the shield to both the computer and printer chassis Using fewer connections than shown in the table may prevent the computer from controlling some printer functions 36 wire cables are recommended C 4 Appendix C Parallel Interface Signal Pin Gus input signal for strobing data into the printer Normally high Pulse width minimum is 1 ms These 8 signals represent the 8 bit data byte DATA2 All eight bits of each character are transmitted to the DATA3 printer simultaneously A high level represents a DATA4 binary 1 digit a low level represents a binary O DATA 5 digit Data pulse width minimum is 3 ms Data lines DATA 6 must be asserted before the strobe goes low DATA7 DATA8 co Non KON V p e pla le le p e ble le eo ACKNLG The printer sends this pulse to the computer after each character is received ACKNLG may be referred to as a data request pulse indicating that data were received and the printer is ready to accept more ACKNLG is set high until it receives a character then goes low with a pulse width of 5 ms This signal works together with the BUSY signal When
130. ample the data byte with pattern 00001 110 can be identified by decimal number 14 or equally well by hexadecimal number OE Operators Guide 127 The table below shows equivalent binary decimal and hexadecimal numbers for 17 different data bytes Binary Decimal Hexadecimal Number Number Number 00000000 00000001 00000010 0000001 1 00000100 00000101 00000110 000001 11 00001000 00001001 00001010 0000101 1 00001100 00001 101 00001110 00001 111 00010000 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A chart at the end of the Operations section shows corresponding decimal and hexadecimal numbers for all 256 possible data bytes 128 Universal Control Commands THREE CATEGORIES OF DATA BYTES The printer takes specific action for each data byte received Tyvo types of action are possible A character is printed or a controlling operation is performed All data bytes are classified into three categories e Printable characters e Control codes e Elements in a control sequence or command Each category is described in the following paragraphs Printable Characters Characters are printable symbols Letters numbers punctuation marks graphic shapes and all other symbols that can be printed as a unit within a single cell A blank space is also a valid character Control Codes A control code is a single byte of control information that modifies printer action It commands the printer to change something For example a control co
131. ance aid and an option to recall original factory default settings A map of the configuration menu selections and options along with the original factory defaults which are underlined is shown on Pages 56 through 57 At the extreme right edge of the map are page references for more information ACCESSING THE CONFIGURATION MENU If the printer is off press FORM FEED while turning on the printer FF BACK If the printer is on press and hold ON LINE and then simultaneously press FORM FEED and LINE FEED aa CINE FF u LF EXIT BACK YES The printer prints out the first line of the configuration menu selection HELP OPTIONS 48 Configuration NAVIGATING THE CONFIGURATION MENU To move through the menu you must respond to the menu options and queries using the YES BACK and NEXT keys NLQ E l TA and ME YES BACK NEXT For example in response to Help Options above press YES The printer prints Status Print 2 If you do not want a Status Print then press NEXT to move on to the next configuration item Menu Tree If you need to change direction in the menu you can reverse the query string by pressing BACK This returns you to Status Print Status Print If you change your mind about Status Print press YES and the printer prints out the present default settings similar to the one shown on Page 60 The moment you press YES the printer executes the request either pr
132. and 12 Cell Values Ascending Characters 128 N w D a D o o Cell Values o Descending e Characters 128 o R Ol Z cQ oo c Column 73 148 34 73 148 34 73 148 34 O Totals ABO X1 Note Print shaded characters and line drawing characters at 6 Ipi line spacing to obtain the full effect of the extension 168 Universal Control Commands This matrix shows the dots the printer adds in Rows 10 11 and 12 from the data specified in the matrix on the previous page oO N Oo a AR N E z ABO Y1 Operators Guide 169 EXAMPLE 3 This example shows how to define and download a near letter quality character Dots printed in first print pass 1 11 Be IRIS Column 129 130 132 136 144 160 192 0 ABO ZA 170 Universal Control Commands e Dots printed in first print pass Dots printed in second print pass Dots offset 1 2 dot vertically 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 Characters Cell Values Descending 128 Characters 64 128 32 64 16 32 o EN co N EN N ABO ZA The follovving BASIC program dovvnloads this character to data byte value 48 decimal and selects it for printing The character is
133. aracter map GO can be mapped only into the lower data bytes G1 G2 and G3 may be mapped into either or both the lower and upper data bytes Before you can access map G1 through G3 in the upper data bytes the 8 Bit DEC option must be selected from the configuration menu otherwise the command is stored in memory until the upper data bytes have been enabled DEC LA210 Control Commands The control commands to select character maps GO through G3 are e ESC n Seleet GO ESC n Select G1 e ESC n Select G2 ESC n Select G3 n specifies the character map as follows n Character Map n Character Map n Character Map A United Kingdom Z Spain 5 Finland B United States h Hebrew 6 NorvvaylDenmark K Germany Multilingual 7 Sweden R France 0 VT100Line Draw 9 Canada Y Italy With the exception of Multilingual and VT100 Line Draw the available character maps are national use character maps See Appendix D for charts of these character maps Additional information for each command is provided on the following pages ESC n Select GO ASCII ESC n Control crR n Decimal 27 40 n Hexadecimal 1B 28 n Assigns a character map to GO n specifies one of the character maps listed previously This control command does not change the character set currently in use The selection takes effect when GO is mapped into the lower data bytes using control code SI GO cannot be mapped into the upper data bytes Operator
134. aracters 0 0058 ma max ENVIRONMENTAL Temperature Operating 50 to 100 F approx 10 to 40 C Non Operating 40 to 150 F approx 40 to 65 C Humidity Operating 2096 to 8096 and noncondensing Non Operating 1096 to 9096 and noncondensing Altitude Operating 400 ft to 10 000 ft approx 125 m to 3000 m above Miscellaneous INTERFACE MSL Non Operating 400 ft to 40 000 ft approx 125 m to 12 000 m above MSL Avoid exposure to water toxic chemicals or corrosive substances See Appendixes B and C for serial and parallel interface signals and cable requirements Operators Guide A 13 PAPER Note The printer may not operate reliably or efficiently with all possible forms that fit the paper requirements specified below Bond Weight The following table applies to single and multipart forms Multipart forms are understood to be any carbonless or carbon backed paper Total Width thickness 0 002 0 005 in 0 065 0 13 mm 3 part 40 52 g m2 34 45 kg ream 4 part 11 14 Ib 40 52 g m2 34 45 kg ream 5 part 11 14 Ib 40 52 g m2 34 45 kg ream 6 part 11 14 Ib 40 52 g m2 34 45 kg ream Note g m Weight of a sheet of paper 39 37 x 39 37 in 1000 x 1000 mm kg ream Weight of 1000 sheets of paper 31 02 x 42 95 in 788 x 1091 mm Ib Weight of 500 sheets of paper 17 x 22 in 431 8 x 558 8 mm For example 64 gm 55 kg ream 17 Ib A 14 Appendix A Specifications Size
135. aracters does not activate them After you download a character or characters using universal control commands you must map them into the active character set using still other universal control commands or the Accept User Defined Characters setting Page 90 under Overlay Characters in the configuration menu Only then does Print Active Character Set Page 54 and Print Data Byte Map Page 61 reveal the character substitution s Operators Guide 67 PRINT STYLE Pressing YES prints out the first of the print style options listed below e Near Letter Quality e Bi Directional Graphics NLQ e Bold Print e Italics e Char Inch e Slash Zero Other print style settings are available using universal and emulation control commands Near Letter Quality Pressing YES prints out the active NLQ status e Off factory default e On Off The printer prints draft quality characters Draft quality printing is about three to four times as fast as that of NLQ printing Draft characters can be bolded and or italicized Note Optical character recognition OCR fonts cannot be printed in draft quality mode 68 Configuration On The printer prints near letter quality NLQ characters in 10 12 and 15 pitch 10 12 and 15 charlin NLQ characters have about two to three times the dot density of draft quality characters NLQ characters are more attractive than comparable draft quality characters Most NLQ characte
136. aracters following this command are printed in bold strike See BASIC example under ESC F 214 Epson FX 100 Control Commands ESCF Emphasized Mode Bold Strike OFF ASCII ESC F Control ctrl F Decimal 27 70 Hexadecimal 1B 46 Cancels emphasized printing bold strike set with ESC E ESC n ESC Az n or SOH Az n Example REM PRINT IN BOLD STRIKE LPRINT CHR 27 E LPRINT Now printing in bold strike REM CANCEL BOLD STRIKE LPRINT CHR 27 F LPRINT Now printing in single strike ESC Set Cancel Underline ASCII ESC n Control CTRL n Decimal 27 45 n Hexadecimal 1B 2D n Sets and cancels the underline function n specifies whether the function is set or cancelled as follows e n 1or49 Set underline function e n Oor48 Cancel underline function Example REM SET UNDERLINE FUNCTION LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 1 LPRINT Underline function is on REM CANCEL UNDERLINE FUNCTION LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 0 LPRINT Underline function is now off Operators Guide 215 ESC S Set Subscript Superscript ASCII ESC S n Control cm S n Decimal 27 83 n Hexadecimal 1B 53 n Prints characters following this control command as subscript or superscript characters n specifies which is selected as follows e n 1or49 Select subscript e n 0or48 Select superscript Subscript or superscript characters are printed at normal heig
137. arrier places positive voltage on Detect know that circuit has been Detect this pin when circuit has been DCD established DCD established Data Output Control signal DTE Data Input Control signal from Terminal places positive voltage on this Terminal other device that lets DCE Ready pin when powered up Ready know that other RS 232 C DTR DTR device is powered up DTE DCE Device Chart B 6 Appendix B Serial Interface With the exception of Frame Ground and Signal Ground the nine signals can be categorized as data signals or control signals and are paired as shown below Data Signal Pair Pin 2 Transmitted Data TxD Pin 3 Received Data RxD Control Signal Pin 4 Request to Send RTS Pair Pin 5 Clear to Send CTS Control Signal Pin 6 Data Set Ready DSR Pair Pin 20 Data Term DTR Ready Pin 8 Data Carrier Detect is also a control signal but it does not have a functional pair Some situations require a high voltage on this input to allow communication See Making a Serial Cable on Page B 9 Operator s Guide B 7 SERIAL INTERFACE PIN OUTS FOR PRINTER The printer is a DTE device The table that follows summarizes the pin assignments on the printer end of a serial interface Pin amp SignalNam Abbr Commen Frame Ground FG Transmitted Data TxD Received Data RxD Request To Send RTS Always high 12v signal level Clear To Send CTS optional not implemented Data Set Ready DSR opt
138. ary ROM or RAM currently selected for each data byte value between 0 and 255 CODE PAGE A predefined IBM character map COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS The combination of settings for baud parity handshaking data bits and stop bits that specify the way data are transmitted between devices enabling accurate data transmission Set communication parameters in the configuration menu CONTROL CODE A single byte of information that starts stops or modifies printer action CONTROL CODE MAP A fixed assignment of control codes to some of the data byte values between 0 and 255 CONTROL COMMAND Two or more bytes of control information that cause the printer to perform specific functions Operator s Guide G 3 DATA BITS Defines the number of data bits in each byte transmitted A setting of 7 data bits is used to send ASCII characters 0 through 127 A setting of 8 data bits is required for sending graphics data and data byte values between characters 128 through 255 DATA BYTE A string of 7 or 8 bits that represents one character DATA BYTE ACTION MAP Describes whether a data byte value between 0 and 255 is currently defined as a control code or a printable character DATA BYTE MAP A group of five maps in printer memory that describe the action the printer is currently set to perform when it receives a data byte A complete data byte map consists of the data byte action map the control code map the character source map the char
139. at to print when each of these codes is received from the computer The codes can be assigned to keyboard characters 0 9 a z A Z etc foreign characters such as E linedraw features such as ee eoo and symbols such as t u barcodes In addition codes can be assigned for sounding the beeper feeding a form causing a horizontal tab and so on Literally there are thousands of character and control possibilities but only 256 can be assigned at any one time Either you or your application software chooses the active character set But the choice is primarily made by the application software For example if you draw a box around text your MS Word application automatically chooses a linedraw character set or if you select the Swedish language in MS Windows some of the keys on your keyboard cause Swedish characters to be printed You can assign a default character set for each printer emulation in the configuration menu See Character Option Page 81 The preselected character set is automatically set as the active character set after you switch emulations But like most configuration default settings your application software can change the active character set Appendix D shows all of the control code and character maps for all of the built in emulations Configuration This section provides details on using the printer s configuration menu Among other things the configuration menu contain
140. ateries 98 Changing Ribbon Cartridge uu nnnne nene ee eve enen eee ene 99 Changing Forms COM pre S SON aaa nana nane eee even 104 Ghangin di FUSES ex aio xe p Le dihet veas eei umen 107 Vertical Image ATQrEmentL eve aromen E e tete reso teet MR 110 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting By the Numbers sssssssese 115 Troubleshooting Chart zo our ae induce tuu iu earned de 119 Beeps 119 Messages Printed sss 120 xiv Contents Troubleshooting continued tall s Epson EMmulalloni da iii s ne 123 Print POSIIONINO 5i dete tat s t 123 Paper Problems ht de duo p nt de e dte 124 SO Pr 127 Communications aseo ei Ao x shohe FARMER ho AES E NRME 129 Printhead Performasr6e iic iioc kan XD Da DDR RR 130 Troubleshooting Aids uitae np eet eges erdt aed occus 131 Power Up Sequence TeSt c eccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 131 Hex Dump Mode sisti pop nanan E endo Svo 132 Control Commands An Introduction Communication Basics aaa eee eee eee e eee eee teke eee 135 Identifying Data Bytes ilie dia decane eles 136 Binary Number System kana nannn nenes eve vene vene nenen eee 137 Decimal Number System sessseeeeeeeeee 137 Hexadecimal Number System ssssesssssss 138 Three Categories of Data Bytes ssssssssusss 140 Sending Control Codes and Control Sequences 141
141. ation is even with the TOF arrow gt near the right and left edges of the platen FES Ba erf fork L Locating Top Of Form JBO AK1 2 With the printer off line press TOF The beeper sounds to confirm your new top of form setting Operators Guide 31 SWITCHING NLQ AND DRAFT You can switch back and forth between near letter quality NLQ and draft quality print modes by pressing and holding ON LINE and then momentarily pressing NLQ NLQ LINE TOF EXIT NEXT In NLQ mode the NLQ indicator lights After switching modes you must press ON LINE to place printer on line You can also preselect a startup print mode in the configuration menu This assures that the preferred print mode is automatically set after you turn on the printer Draft print mode is the factory default startup print mode If desired see Near Letter Quality Page 72 in the Configuration section to change the startup print mode Once the printer is on you can switch freely between NLQ and draft print modes using either the hot key explained above or more commonly by using a printer driver that matches your printer s present emulation See Emulations and Printer Drivers that follows 32 Operations Emulations and Printer Drivers When a printer acts like another printer it is said to emulate that printer Your printer can emulate an Epson FX 100 IBM Proprinter XL or DEC LA210 printer You can switch between emulations as detai
142. ator access during this procedure 1 Open the operator access door 2 Make sure the printhead gap adjustment lever is positioned as far as possible toward the front of the printer so that the gap between the printheads and platen is as wide as possible 3 Turn on the printer 4 Begin a printout by Sending a file about three pages of characters to the printer Running a self test See Running a Self Test Page 29 5 See the Note below and then move the printhead gap adjustment lever toward the platen The printout appears Note The printhead gap must be set at normal print speed As a safety feature when using fast pitch 10 pitch printing the printer prints at half speed if the operator access door is open To temporarily cancel half speed printing during printhead gap adjustment press and hold TOF while the printer prints Printhead Gap Adjustment Lever JBO AJ1 Caution Operators Guide 27 Adjust the printhead gap adjustment lever for desired print quality Note The ideal setting of the printhead gap adjustment lever for longest ribbon and printhead life is just before printed dots begin to disappear For multipart paper check the bottom copy Do not use the printhead gap adjustment lever to compensate for light print as the ribbon cartridge begins to run out of ink Narrowing the gap between the platen and printheads may cause excessive wear on the printheads and cause drag on the printhe
143. below Increasing character pitch allows more characters to be printed per line ESC SI duplicates the function of the SI command Current Pitch After SI or ESC SI 5 0 8 57 6 0 9 1 7 5 9 1 10 0 17 14 12 0 18 2 15 0 18 2 Current character pitches of 8 33 8 57 9 1 16 67 17 14 and 18 2 are unaffected by this command See DC2 on the following page to cancel condensed pitch Example REM SET 12 PITCH REM THEN CHANGE TO 10 PITCH REM AFTER THAT CHANGE TO 17 14 PITCH AS FOLLOWS LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 58 LPRINT Now printing in 12 cpi LPRINT CHR 18 LPRINT Now printing in 10 cpi LPRINT CHR 15 LPRINT Now printing in 17 14 cpi LPRINT CHR 13 Operators Guide 245 DC2 Cancel Condensed Pitch ASCII DC2 Control CTRLR Decimal 18 Hexadecimal 12 Cancels condensed pitch set by SI or ESC SI Returns to the pitch that was set prior to using SI or ESC SI Also cancels 12 pitch set by ESC and resets to 10 pitch Previous New Pitch After Previous New Pitch After Pitch After Slor DC2 Pitch After ESC DC2 ESC SI 5 0 8 33 5 0 Any 12 10 6 0 9 1 6 0 7 5 9 1 7 5 10 0 16 67 10 0 12 0 18 2 12 0 15 0 18 2 15 0 Note To reset 7 5 or 15 0 pitch use universal control command SOH Az Example REM CHANGE FROM 10 PITCH TO 17 14 PITCH LPRINT CHR 15 LPRINT Printing in 17 14 pitch REM CANCEL 17 14 PITCH RETURN TO 10 PITCH LPRINT CHR 18 LPRINT Printing in 10 pitch 246 IBM P
144. bology For more on this see Appendix E Barcode Density Pressing YES prints out the active setting e 75 dpi factory default e 100 dpi 75 dpi For barcodes 75 dpi is analogous to draft quality mode If the barcode reader successfully reads a low density barcode choosing the 75 dpi barcode density increases printer throughput The 75 dpi setting may actually enhance readability 100 dpi For barcodes 100 dots per in is analogous to near letter quality mode Use 100 dpi for USPS PostNet Operators Guide 87 SYSTEM OPTIONS Pressing YES prints out the first of the system options listed below e Factory Reset e Lock Character Set and Emulation e Initialize Sensitivity e Vertical Alignment Factory Reset Note f you reset the configuration menu settings to factory defaults all custom characters previously downloaded with universal control commands are lost Press YES to reset all configuration menu settings to factory defaults Before actually resetting the printer prints Reset Menu Settings to Defaults Press YES to execute the factory reset After a couple of seconds the printer prints Reset Done Lock Character Set and Emulation Pressing YES prints out the active setting e Off factory default e On Pressing YES to On causes the printer to hide configuration menu selections for Emulation Page 80 and Character Options Page 81 With the character set and emulation locked the options que
145. characteristics A 2 physical A 12 reliability A 12 requirements A 13 safety features A 11 Startup 4 Static electricity 96 Status printout 58 Stop bits 70 Subscript Superscript 75 Supplies vi Operator s Guide I 3 Switch panel 7 problems 127 Top of form 4 control key 9 setting 30 Tractor 3 adjusting 22 26 Troubleshooting 115 chart 119 beeps 119 communications 129 messages 120 paper problems 126 print positioning 123 print quality 122 printhead performance 130 switch panel 127 hex dump mode 132 test 131 Universal control commands index of 150 Vertical image alignment 110 Voltage selection 107 Wiring diagrams serial interface B 10 XON XOFF 65 B 15
146. ches set with ESC W n ESC n SOH Az n or ESC Az n Example REM SET TO 10 PITCH REM AFTER THAT ENLARGE TO 5 PITCH REM FINALLY CANCEL ENLARGED PITCH REM TO RETURN TO 10 PITCH AS FOLLOWS LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 33 CHR 0 LPRINT Now printing in 10 cpi LPRINT CHR 14 LPRINT Now printing in 5 cpi LPRINT CHR 20 LPRINT Now printing in 10 cpi again LPRINT CHR 13 Operators Guide 211 ESCW Set Cancel Enlarged Pitch ASCII ESC Ww n Control cTRL W n Decimal 27 87 n Hexadecimal 1B 57 n Sets and cancels enlarged pitch n specifies whether the function is set or cancelled e n 1o0r49 Set enlarged pitch e n 0or48 Cancel enlarged pitch Setting enlarged pitch causes the currently selected pitch to become enlarged as follows Current After ESC W Previous After ESC W Pitch 1 Pitch 0 18 2 9 1 9 1 18 2 16 67 8 33 8 33 16 67 15 0 7 5 7 5 15 12 0 6 0 6 0 12 10 0 5 0 5 0 10 ESC W 1 or ESC W 49 causes enlarged pitch to remain in effect until changed by one of the following e ESCW 0 ESCAz n e ESCW 48 SOHAz n e ESC n Note Enlarged pitch is called Double Wide Printing by some manufacturers This command is not valid when NLQ printing is selected 212 Epson FX 100 Control Commands Example REM SET ENLARGED PITCH LPRINT CHR 27 W CHR 1 This is large REM CANCEL ENLARGED PITCH LPRINT CHR 27 W CHR 0 This is small
147. cimal 27 68 n1 n32 0 Hexadecimal 1B 44 n1 n32 00 Sets multiple horizontal tabs A maximum of 28 tabs may be set with one command Note that this control command is terminated with a null byte This command clears all existing horizontal tabs Therefore to add one tab you must include all existing tabs plus the new one ESC D only sets the tabs The Horizontal Tab control code HT causes the printer to tab to each subsequent tab n denotes the character position of each tab The valid range for n is from 1 to one less than the right margin minus the left margin Send the values of n in ascending order An out of order tab value is interpreted as a terminator The tabs are set relative to the left margin An n value of 1 sets the tab at the left margin A maximum value of n sets the tab one character to the left of the right margin Therefore n is the character position relative to the left margin not the actual column number The following shows the location of tabs for various values of n Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Margins L R n 2 T n 5 T n 7 T 254 IBM Proprinter Control Commands Example REM SET HORIZONTAL TABS TO COLS 6 12 amp 30 LPRINT CHR 27 D CHR 6 CHR 12 LPRINT CHR 30 CHR 0 HT Horizontal Tab ASCII HT Control CTRL Decimal 9 Hexadecimal 09 Causes the printer to tab to the next tab setting set by control command ESC D or to the default tab every 8 colu
148. code Format command These tables apply only to Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5 Codabar settings are sufficiently complex to require careful analysis of the Uniform Symbol Description USD 4 for Codabar For UPC and EAN bar codes we recommend the parameters be used without adjustment Adjusting the symbols is likely to make them unreadable Parameter Formula Principle IT P5 gt 2 x P4 and VVide bar is 2 to 3 times vvider than narrovv bar P5 lt 3 x P4 P6 P4 Narrow space width equals narrow bar width P7 P5 Wide space width equals wide bar width P8 gt P4 and Intercharacter gap is 1 to 9 times as wide as P8 lt 9 P4 3 narrow bar width Valid Comparative Settings Narrow Bar 4 5 Wide Bar 9 12 11 15 Narrow Space 4 5 Wide Spacet 9 12 11 15 Intercharacter Gap 0 9 4 36 5 45 T See formula above Glossary ASCENDERS That part of a character that rises above the waist line Also a term used for superscript characters ASCII CHARACTERS ASCII is an acronym for American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII characters are unique 7 bit values that represent letters numbers spaces and symbols This coding scheme allows for standardization of data and control communication between devices BASELINE The imaginary horizontal line on which a character or line of characters rests BAUD The speed at which data flows between the printer and computer measured in bits of information transmitted per
149. command must be in the following form ASCII SOH A Zz L Control CTRL A A Z L Decimal 1 65 122 76 48 Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 4C 30 Note The zero in the Stop Barcode command can be entered either as the character zero as shown or as the decimal value zero Operators Guide E 19 EXAMPLES EXAMPLE 1 This example shows a BASIC program to format and print three 3 4 in high Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode symbols The human readable line is on and default values are used for bar and space widths Two of the barcode symbols encode the characters 1988 and the third barcode symbol encodes the characters 123456789123456789 REM FORMAT INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 BARCODE SYMBOLS LPRINT CHR 1 AzM CHR 0 CHR 0 CHR 1 LPRINT CHR 1 CHR 3 CHR 1 CHR 3 CHR 1 REM START BARCODE LPRINT CHR 1 AzL1 REM PRINT TWO BARCODE SYMBOLS ENCODING REM CHARACTERS 1988 REM ADVANCE PAPER THEN PRINT REM ONE BARCODE SYMBOL ENCODING CHARACTERS REM 123456789123456789 LPRINT 1988 1988 CHR 13 LPRINT 123456789123456789 CHR 13 REM END BARCODE LPRINT CHR 1 AzLO Jb TIAE JBO BI E 20 Appendix E Barcodes EXAMPLE 2 This example shows a BASIC program to format and print one 1 in high UPC A barcode symbol The human readable line is on and default values are used for bar and space widths The barcode symbol encodes the number system character 0 the characters 1234567890 and the check digit 5
150. cs NLQ eeeessssss 73 Bold Printer TEL 74 tallo eei o a a A A 74 SubscrpUSuperscflpL i eoe ee arro nri 75 GA IGN scene cach ta i eet coor uso Sak aot 75 Slash A ETE EET a i aiii iiih 76 FORMS PHONG urarena e ii h Nd A 76 LASS reser pp 77 Form Length iere io er roe peo a aeaa 77 SKIP PET HP 78 BEINE T 78 CEUOIL EP S iata et atten ante 79 Paper Jam Delect ub Dopo tace 80 Paper SDBBU roit tao dede p Ma dotes 80 FMAM OM diye cece sees du neq eut ne De uq au Oe inca xe rae e Ue oe LEUR 80 Character ODIODS aiies a ete E 81 Epson Character Options sess 82 IBM Character Options 2 cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 85 DEG Character Options zie diio di xt add xoti ounce ts 87 Overlay Glaractete u iti atio ee tt 90 Barcode OPHONS iio RE rH pp ea pb cU EU 91 Operators Guide xiii Configuration continued Barcode Strike rccte etr areas 91 Barcode DOnslly 52 eite eia Middle Menus 91 System Options s gi edo ated red eade eot ede die de cer 92 Factory Resets uses deer da sh ba ds PUO de ies 92 Lock Character Set and Emulation 92 Initialize SENSI s oo inv au Eb E aut 93 Vertical ATlgnrieblt s varin dua rus d cue temen 93 Maintenance Statlc EIGCWIOty oe pe on 95 RIG ANING peue E 97 Interior Surfaces nare sen ce teicnsdad sia neta eatdnid hehe ciaictin 97 Exterior SUN AC S c5 oie dtd adiecto dd EAE 98 DUbRICA NO Nk D e
151. ctional Graphics NLQ Bold Frint Sub Super Script Char Inch Slash Zero Status Printout Partial Example Showing Factory Defaults Farallel DTR X QONZX FF High n n 9600 8 bit None i bit Maximum no user defined characters off Oft Off Off 10 On JBO AZ1 Operators Guide 57 Print Data Byte Map Pressing YES prints out the present data byte map Primarily the data byte map is a troubleshooting and development tool used in customizing character sets In content the present data byte map is similar to the active character set printout The data byte map not only shows the 256 active character and control code assignments as does the active character set but it also identifies the source of the character or code Part of a data byte map is shown on Page 63 for Data Bytes 96 through 106 Column headings are explained below See the Universal Control Commands section for more information concerning data byte maps To stop this three page printout before completion and to move on to the next configuration menu item press EXIT Data Byte The decimal data byte number Data bytes are numbered 0 through 255 Action Indicates whether the data byte is to be interpreted as a printable character CHAR or as a nonprintable control code CTRL Control Code For a CTRL action this column contains a standard abbreviation for the control code For example FF would indicate the form feed contr
152. d ni n MOD 256 n2 INT n 256 136 Universal Control Commands This formula for determining n1 and n2 is used for graphics commands and for specifying a range of characters in some commands such as the commands to map or download characters DATA BYTE VALUES OF COMMAND PARAMETERS A source of confusion arises because three of the conventions used to specify command parameters use numbers For example 48 could be a decimal data byte a hexadecimal data byte or an ASCII character representation of a two byte sequence 4 followed by 8 The conventions used in the emulations of the 4100 printer are specified in the following paragraphs Universal Epson and IBM Control Commands Univeral Epson and IBM control commands use n to indicate the decimal value of a single data byte For example n 75 is the data byte identified by decimal number 75 This is the same data byte identified by hexadecimal number 4B and ASCII character K DEC Control Commands DEC control commands use n to indicate an ASCII character or sequence of ASCII characters For example n 75 7 5 7 5 isa two byte sequence The decimal numbers are 55 and 53 and the ASCII characters are 7 and 5 ZEROS AND ONES Since upper case O s and zeroes look similar zeroes in control commands are shown with slashes Since lower case els I and ones look similar lower case els in control commands are shown as scripted els Operators Gui
153. d SOH AzC cancels the bottom margin setting Therefore to re establish the bottom margin after this command is set send another Skip Over Perforation command SOH AzC does not cancel Skip Perforation set in the configuration menu When the printer receives this command the current form position becomes the top of form n can be for example decimal 1 or ASCII character 1 Operators Guide 141 EMULATION MODE SOHAZA Select Emulation and Reset Printer ASCII SOH A z A n Control CTRLA A Zz A n Decimal 1 65 122 65 n Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 41 n Selects the printer emulation mode and the character set that has been selected from the configuration menu for the selected emulation n specifies the emulation as follows e n 0 Epson FX 100 emulation e n 1 IBM Proprinter XL emulation e n 3 DEC LA210 emulation This command also initializes the printer It initiates the same process as turning the printer on The printer functions as specified by the configuration menu a can be for example decimal 1 or ASCII character 1 142 Universal Control Commands MISCELLANEOUS SOHAzY n 144 Inch Line Spacing ASCII SOH A z Y n Control CTRLA A Zz Y n Decimal 1 65 122 89 n Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 59 n Sets line spacing to n 144 in The valid range for n is from 0 to 170 Changing the line spacing affects the amount of space between lines not the height of the characters SOHAzX
154. d areas D 14 Appendix D Character Sets DEC 7 BIT CO CONTROL CODE MAP 0 8 1 9 NUL 0 128 16 144 SOH DC1 1 129 17 145 2 130 18 146 DC3 3 131 19 147 4 132 20 148 Bum ous 5 133 21 149 6 134 22 150 ms ans 7 135 23 151 8 136 24 152 EG 9 137 25 153 ionas ans 10 138 26 154 VT ESC FF CR SO Las ove 15 143 31 159 Operator s Guide D 15 DEC 8 BIT CONTROL CODE MAPS 8 9 0 NUL DCS 128 144 129 145 2 3 CO Control Code 4 C1 Control Code Map for Lower Map for Upper Half of DEC 5 Half of DEC 8 Bit Character 8 Bit Character Set 6 Set D 16 Appendix D Character Sets THE CHARACTER MAP All of the popular character maps can be selected from the configuration menu under Character Options You can select these same character maps using control commands There are two types of configuration menu character maps e Emulation dependent character maps that are more or less complete collections of characters e Emulation independent character maps that are partial assortments of special characters such as the OCR A and OCR B overlays You can select one of the OCR overlays under Overlay Characters in the Character Options portion of the configuration menu The overlay characters replace the characters that were mapped in from the emulation dependent character map The configuration menu character maps are listed and illustrated on the following pages Operator s
155. d as a high signal a bit set to logical 0 is transmitted as a low signal Input data and all interface control signals are compatible with TTL Transistor Transistor Logic levels 0 to 5 volts SYNCHRONIZATION Synchronization is accomplished by externally supplied STROBE pulses The port receives data prior to the leading negative edge of STROBE HANDSHAKING Handshaking is accomplished by ACKNLG acknowledge and BUSY signals These signals control data flow across the parallel interface The computer monitors the state of BUSY to determine if the printer is ready to accept a character If BUSY is not asserted the computer sends a character to the interface on DATA 1 through DATA 8 After the data setup time the computer asserts STROBE As each character is received the leading negative edge of STROBE clocks the BUSY flipflop which resets it This asserts the BUSY signal and latches the received character into the parallel port register When the printer has processed the character and is ready for another it sets the BUSY flipflop This negates the BUSY signal and produces a 5 m s ACKNLG pulse The interface is ready to accept another character as soon as the ACKNLG pulse begins The asterisks following a signal name signifies that logic 1 is an active low Operator s Guide C 3 PARALLEL INTERFACE PIN OUTS FOR PRINTER The table that follows summarizes the pin assignments on the printer end of the par
156. d canned or compressed air which can force dust and dirt into printer mechanisms Before you vacuum remove the ribbon cartridge Page 99 While you vacuum move the printhead carriage from side to side to vacuum debris from under the carriage path Do not force vacuum attachments into hard to reach places and limit vacuuming to the area directly beneath the cartridge and carriage Absolute cleanliness is not necessary Never use a liquid cleaner including soap and water inside the printer 92 Maintenance EXTERIOR SURFACES Surfaces including the operator access window can be cleaned with a soft cloth dampened with soap and water Remember The cloth should be moist not dripping wet Avoid petroleum based cleaners and solvents such as lighter fluid paint thinner and the like If necessary use a commercial cleaner such as 409 to clean ink from surfaces When using a spray apply the cleaner to a soft cloth and then apply to the printer Isopropyl alcohol 7096 9096 can be used instead of a commercial cleaner except as noted below Caution DO NOT use alcohol on the switch panel Alcohol if it seeps beneath the keypad weakens the adhesive that binds the keypad laminates LUBRICATION Periodic lubrication is not required All moving parts are either lubricated for life or require no special periodic lubrication In fact unwarranted lubrication could cause damage or impaired performance 409 is a brand name of
157. de 137 Universal Control Commands This section describes control commands that are unique to the printer Universal control commands can be used in any emulation mode Before using these commands read the previous section Control Commands An Introduction It describes the typographic conventions used in this section and contains other information needed to send universal control commands in the correct format All universal control commands must begin with the sequence SOH Az or the sequence ESC Az SOH Az provides maximum compatibility with other printer models and is the sequence documented in this manual Note Control command SOH AzP and control commands that begin with the sequence SOH AzZ are reserved for internal use within the printer Character sequences that begin with these strings causes unpredictable action Universal control commands for formatting and printing bar codes are shown for reference in this section See Appendix E for complete information 138 Universal Control Commands INDEX OF UNIVERSAL CONTROL COMMANDS Form Length Length of Form in Millimeters SOHAzC n Emulation Mode Select Emulation and Reset Printer SOHAZzA n Miscellaneous n 144 Inch Line Spacing SOHAzY n Reset to Power Up Settings SOHAz X Q Print Style Set Pitch and Strike SOH Az n Select Print Quality SOH Az T n Barcodes Enable Disable Barcode Printing SOH Az L n Set Barcode Parameters SOH Az M P1 P8 Ma
158. de here This setting may also be changed using the Overlay Characters option on the configuration menu The following are valid settings for m m O0 Download but do not select m 1 Download and select immediately n1 and n2 specify the range of data byte values to which the download characters are assigned Data must be sent for each character in the range specified by n1 and n2 To download only one character send the same data Operators Guide 163 aq is a single data byte that specifies the vertical expansion characteristics of each download character Bit values for ag are as follows aa Bit Setting 7 0 Ascending character such as h d A R 1 Descending character such as y p g 2 6 Ignored 1andO Vertical expansion as follows 00 or 11 No vertical expansion 01 Line drawing character data in Row 8 are copied into Rows 10 11 and 12 10 Shaded character data in Rows 6 7 and 8 are copied into Rows 10 11 and 12 Decimal values for aq are as follows aa Setting 0 or 3 Ascending character no vertical expansion 1 Line drawing character Row 8 copied 2 Shaded character Rows 6 7 and 8 copied 128 or 131 Descending character 129 Descending character line drawing Row 8 copied 130 Descending character shaded Rows 6 7 and 8 copied ap is a single data byte that specifies the print quality of a downloaded character as follows e ab 0 Draft NLQ Send 10 columns of character data for c1 through
159. de sent to the printer might advance the paper to the top of the next page or it might sound the beeper Control codes are assigned to data bytes according to the emulation active in the printer Specific assignments are shown in Appendix D The majority of the control codes are normally assigned to data bytes between 0 and 31 decimal and between 128 and 159 decimal Operators Guide 129 Control Commands A control command is two or more bytes of control information The first data byte is the control code that signals the printer to interpret succeeding data bytes as control information instead of printable characters or other control codes In Epson IBM and DEC emulations this control code is ESC data byte 27 decimal Control commands that begin with ESC are commonly known as escape sequences The control code used to introduce the universal control commands in the next section is SOH data byte 1 decimal Control commands are defined by printer manufacturers to provide more control options than those contained in ASCII or ANSI standards Control codes and control commands may be embedded anywhere in the data stream SENDING CONTROL CODES AND CONTROL COMMANDS You can send commands to the printer with any programming language Techniques vary with the hardware and software used In many cases it is done automatically by the application program Several examples are shown here for illustration 130 Universal Control Comma
160. ds INDEX OF CONTROL CODES AND COMMANDS Character Sets Select IBM Character Set 2 ESC 6 Select IBM Character Set 1 ESC 7 All Characters Character Set ESC n1 n2 Print One Character From All Character Set ESC Form Length Length of Form in Lines ESC C n Length of Form in Inches Graphics Single Density Graphics Double Density Graphics ESC C NUL n ESC K n1 n2 d1 d816 ESC L ESC Y n1 n2 d1 d1632 Quad Density Graphics ESC Z n1 n2 d1 d3264 Line Spacing 7 72 inch ESC 1 1 8 inch ESC n 72 inch ESC A n Start Text Line Spacing Set by ESC A ESC 2 n 216 inch ESC 3 ESC J n 239 239 239 240 241 242 243 244 246 247 247 247 247 248 Margins Set Horizontal Margins Skip Over Perforation Sets Bottom Margin Cancel Skip Over Perforation Miscellaneous Carriage Return Bell Backspace Linefeed Auto Linefeed Form Feed Top of Form Cancel Data in Print Buffer Select Printer Deselect Printer Deselect Printer Print Direction Unidirectional or Bidirectional Print Style Condensed Pitch Cancel Condensed Pitch Enlarged Pitch Cancel Enlarged Pitch Set Cancel Enlarged Pitch Set 12 Pitch Operators Guide 223 ESC X n1 n2 ESC N n ESC O CR BEL BS LF ESC 5 n FF ESC 4 CAN DC1 ESC Q 22 DC3 ESC U n SI or ESC SI DC2 SO or ESC SO DC4 ESC W n ESC 249 250 250 251 251 251 252 252 252 253 253 253 254 254 255
161. e E 3 4 Send the printer the End Barcode command This command tells the printer to print all subsequent data as characters not barcode symbols Send LPRINT CHR 1 AzL to return to text mode If you have problems printing barcodes use the hex dump mode a binary editor and or a BASIC utility to verify and debug your command string For best results use the commands SOH AzM and SOH AzL to format and print barcodes These commands are explained on the following pages They are valid in any emulation mode Note Zeroes contained within control commands such as ESC t are written as to differentiate the number zero from the capital letter For PostNet make sure Barcode Density in the configuration menu is set to 100 dpi For information on how to send the data byte values used in barcode commands to the printer refer to the section titled Control Commands An Introduction That same section also provides a listing of the typographic conventions used with the barcode commands E 4 Appendix E Barcodes BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND The Barcode Format command specifies the characteristics of the barcode symbols to be printed It is not required that this command be sent If it is not sent the default parameter values are used The default value for each parameter is specified in the parameter definitions shown on the following pages The Barcode Format command is shown below ASCII SOH A Z M P1
162. e Configuration Menu Page 51 COMBINATION KEYS The power on off switch and the ON LINE key are used in combination with other keys to perform various operations Although most of these operations can be selected from the configuration menu the hot keys are faster Power Up Hot Keys The power up hot keys allow you to power up the printer perform a power up sequence test and then enter one of three menu or test modes all in the same switch panel operation For all power up hot keys you must press the switch panel key hold that key depress and then turn on the printer Hold down the switch panel key for a couple of seconds after turning on power Operators Guide 11 fS Configuration Menu While ul 0 pressing FORM FEED turn ji v on printer to print out the first configuration menu query See Configuration section Page 49 Self Test VVhile pressing a 0 LINE FEED turn on printer LF T to begin a rolling printout of keyboard characters See Running a Self Test Page 29 To stop printout press ON LINE or turn off the printer f eS Hex Dump Wide Form H 0 While pressing FORM 7 LE FEED and LINE FEED turn BACK YES on printer to place printer in 10 pitch hex dump mode See Hex Dump Mode Page 132 To exit hex dump mode turn off the printer 12 Basics E fA ON BH LINE FF EE I VI EXIT BACK YES p Hex Dump Narrow Form While pre
163. e characters as follows e n 0Oor48 Control codes ignore undefined characters e n 1or49 Printable characters This control sequence works only if you have selected an Epson Character Set Example REM SET AS CONTROL CODES LPRINT CHR 27 I CHR 0 REM SET AS PRINTABLE CHARACTERS LPRINT CHR 27 l CHR 1 186 X Epson FX 100 Control Commands FORM LENGTH ESCC Length of Form in Lines ASCII ESC C n Control cTRL C n Decimal 27 67 n Hexadecimal 1B 43 n Sets form length to n number of lines n must be from 1 to 127 The default setting is 66 lines The current form position becomes the top of form when the printer receives this command If the bottom margin was previously set by the Skip Over Perforation command ESC N the Length of Form in Lines command cancels the bottom margin setting Therefore to re establish the bottom margin after Length of Form in Lines is set send another Skip Over Perforation command Form length is stored as an absolute length equal to the line spacing multiplied by the specified number of lines That form length remains in effect even if the line spacing is changed Example REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 50 LINES LPRINT CHR 27 C CHR 50 Operators Guide 187 ESC C NUL Length of Form in Inches ASCII ESC C NUL n Control cTRL C NUL n Decimal 27 67 0 n Hexadecimal 1B 43 00 n Sets form length to an integer number n of
164. e 27 Running a Self Test uc aeo eo uc qu dee t aq aquo ae d UE 29 Setting Top of Form ah nana e nenen eee eee eee eee 30 Switching NLQ and Draft 2 222 tect id x0 duet des d d cats 32 Changing Emulations a nua oe Sane oe ptr ere peteret eret ae abe 34 Printing the Active Character Set eeesssusssss 36 Configuration The Configuration Menu cudi ik n I ishn tlla Mete ubt Rs 51 Accessing the Configuration Menu ssssesss 51 Navigating the Configuration Menu seessseses 51 Exiting the Configuration Menu cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 58 Adjusting the Printer s Performance nenen nene Configuration Map sene sh ca rd i dad e d bete p mp MR 58 Satis PEDE ao eee Deme E 56 MI NEC Y sig tk os kai b hh atta cutiee ete 58 Non Defa lt List cv dre shiun dos 58 Nd odds ied ae idi seio nb eq 58 Hot Key EISE oeaiei men IO trate a ues 59 Diagnostic Godes ue obo ola ba bus 60 Print Active Character Set ueeeeussss 60 Print Data Byte Map iine iet tetti exeant eden 61 Interface Options apet asish tar 63 Xii Contents Configuration continued Active Interface uico io ER S EHE ERES 63 cerial Options ngasin re nod bc se cot 64 Input Buffer Size jan ki vit dei Lb edite dene 70 PAN Style met 72 Near Letter Quality E PEPPER 72 Bi Directional Graphi
165. e 4100 printer Equipment repair must be performed only by service trained personnel who are aware of the hazards involved Double Pole Neutral Fusing The 4100 printer contains two fuses in the power receptable It is possible for only one fuse to blow If this occurs be warned that even though the POWER indicator is not lit some printer electrical circuit may remain active ALWAYS turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before checking the cause of the blown fuse s and before replacing the fuse s Use only the fuses specified Never use repaired fuses and never short circuit a fuse holder 90 Maintenance STATIC ELECTRICITY Static electricity occurs when objects become electrically charged When charged with static electricity objects tend to attract or repel other objects Static electricity can build up on paper The printer paper can become charged with static electricity as it moves from the feeder slot to the printer s acoustic hood If the static electricity is not discharged from the paper as it exits the printer the paper tends to cling to the printer or printer stand and resist stacking Fortunately the acoustic hood is designed to draw off this static electricity For this reason the manufacturer recommends that you always use the acoustic hood to reduce static electricity as well as to reduce printer noise If you do use the printer without the acoustic hood there are still ways to control or eliminate
166. e Character From All Character Set ASCII ESC i Control CTRL Decimal 27 94 Hexadecimal 1B 5E Prints the next character from an All Character Character Set then returns to the character set in use prior to receipt of the ESC command Example REM PRINT NEXT CHARACTERS FROM ALL CHARACTERS SET LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 206 RESULTS PRINTS 6 ESC enables you to print continuously from an All Characters Character Set ESC is valid for printing one character only Both commands enable printing of characters for data bytes normally recognized as control codes See Appendix D for charts of character sets Operators Guide 229 FORM LENGTH ESC C Length of Form in Lines ASCII ESC C n Control cTRL C n Decimal 27 67 n Hexadecimal 1B 43 n Sets form length to n number of lines n must be from 1 to 255 The default setting is 66 lines The current form position becomes the top of form when the printer receives this command If the bottom margin was previously set by the Skip Over Perforation command ESC N the Length of Form in Lines command cancels the bottom margin setting Therefore to re establish the bottom margin after the Length of Form in Lines command is set send another Skip Over Perforation command Form length is stored as an absolute length equal to the line spacing multiplied by the specified number of lines That form length remains in effect even if the line spacing is chang
167. e carriage return BEL Bell ASCII BEL Control CTRL G Decimal 7 Hexadecimal 07 Sounds the beeper once for approximately 0 1 second BS Backspace ASCII BS Control CTRL H Decimal 8 Hexadecimal 08 Prints any data in the print buffer then backs up one column for the next starting position This is used to create overstrike characters If you have changed the character pitch before sending the BS control code the distance the printer backs up may be inaccurate 240 IBM Proprinter Control Commands LF Linefeed ASCII LF Control CTRL J Decimal 10 Hexadecimal OA Prints any data in the print buffer and advances the paper one line If Auto Carriage Return CR on LF is enabled a carriage return is performed after the linefeed This control code cancels control code SO ESC 5 Auto Linefeed ASCII ESC 5 n Control cTRL 5 n Decimal 27 53 n Hexadecimal 1B 35 n Sets and cancels automatic linefeed LF on CR n specifies whether the function is set or cancelled as follows e n 1 Set automatic linefeed e n 0 Cancel automatic linefeed When automatic linefeed LF on CR is set the printer does a linefeed each time a carriage return is received ESC 5 overrides the automatic linefeed option set from the configuration menu EE Form Feed ASCII FF Control CTRL L Decimal 12 Hexadecimal 0C Prints any data in the pr
168. ed Example REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 50 LINES LPRINT CHR 27 C CHR 50 230 IBM Proprinter Control Commands ESC C NUL Length of Form in Inches ASCII ESC C NUL n Control cIRLI C NUL n Decimal 27 67 0 n Hexadecimal 1B 43 00 n Sets form length to an integer number of inches n n must be from 1 to 151 See Note below The default is 11 in The current form position becomes the top of form when the printer receives this command If the bottom margin was previously set by the Skip Over Perforation command ESC N the Length of Form in Inches command cancels the bottom margin setting Therefore to re establish the bottom margin after Length of Form in Inches is set send another Skip Over Perforation command Note The IBM Proprinter allows a form length range of 1 n 180 in The IBM emulation in the 4100 printer allows a range of 1 lt n lt 151 in An out of range value is ignored Example REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 10 LINES LPRINT CHR 27 C CHR 10 Operators Guide 231 ESCK Single Density Graphics ASCII ESC K n1 n2 d1 d816 Control CTRL K n1 n2 d1 d816 Decimal 27 75 n1 n2 d1 d816 Hexadecimal 1B 4B n1 n2 d1 d816 Causes the printer to print single density graphics dot columns Single density graphics are printed 60 dot columns per horizontal inch n1 and n2 specify the number of dot columns data bytes to reserve for graphics
169. ed using Character Options in the configuration menu Character sets determine what the printer does when you send a data byte to the printer There are only two categories of doable possibilities The printer can either print a character A BC abc 1 23 etc or perform a basic operation form feed beep escape etc e f your computer and printer are set up to transmit and receive only 7 bits of serial or parallel data per byte then your printer can do 128 characters and single code operations e f your computer and printer are set up to transmit and receive 8 bits of data per byte and most are then your printer can do 256 characters and single code operations D 2 Appendix D Character Sets The basic single code operations are standard throughout the printer industry The groupings of basic operations for character sets are called control code maps One common control code map is the ASCII control code map There are slightly over 40 control code possibilities of which a maximum of 32 or 33 control codes are ever assigned at any one time to a character set For a 7 bit data byte that leaves about 128 32 96 codes for characters The printer can print 428 different characters contained in a built in ROM character library Most printers including this one use groupings of these ROM based characters called character maps The character maps make assignment of characters from the character library to the charac
170. eed the limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Le pr sent appareil num rique n met pas de bruits radio lectriques d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques prescrites dans le r glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique ditct par le Minist re des Communications du Canada Operators Guide ix CERTIFICATE OF MANUFACTURER IMPORTER It is hereby certified that the 4100 Series printers have been suppressed in accordance with the conditions set out in the BMPT AmtsbiVfg 243 1991 and 46 1992 The operation of some equipment e g test transmitters in accordance with the regulations may however be subject to certain restrictions Please refer to the notes in the operating instructions The Federal Ministry for Telecommunications Approvals has been notified of the placing of this equipment on the market and has been granted the right to test the series for compliance with the regulations This equipment has been tested concerning compliance with the relevant RFI protection requirements both individually and on system level to simulate normal operation conditions However it is possible that these RFI Requirements are not met under certain unfavorable conditions in other installations It is the user who is responsible for compliance of his particular installation Compliance with applicable regulati
171. eee reve eee eee eee vere vere Memory Config ratioh eses sdua re Safety FORLUK S n s sdin ben ins Pn n ROAD ND R nai sot ni st aciem dun ev de z r n AE A Pez s n id Hequiretmerts coxa oe eit cre At oe tet tere lee EGIT Seris tt e Appendix B Serial Interface Serial Interface Basics ngjan terae ht Serial Interface Pin Outs for Printer aaa nene eee Making a Serial Cable auuaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaannnn ne eee e eve e nenen eee eee eee Connection Examples aaaaaaaaaa nana a nana nenen ne nenen ene e ee seen eee IBM PC to Printer tes e aet IBM PG AT TOPEDIBE 4 ene oot d ELE edet enun Handshaking RE Appendix B Serial Interface continued Operators Guide xix Software Handshaking 5 zi e etico d n ciat iE B 15 Hardware Handshaking eesssesessssss B 17 If You Cannot Make It Work uu uaaa nana neneve eee nenen B 18 Interface CIFOUITS coiere e ER HE ERES CIE E Feed os B 20 Appendix C Parallel Interface Parallel Interface Basics e eee rhe res C 1 BR cR RTT C 2 Synchronization ss rete xe rp E oor asd cos C 2 HandshaklPig serre tn tn h hr EE re Rs C 2 Parallel Interface Pin Outs for Printer cccccccessssssseeeeeeeees C 3 Parallel Interface TIMIN Gana nenen nenen neneve eee C 7 Interface GC INCUINS he roe in e toni Retro ios C 20 Appendix D Character Sets JTOrmiriology auo uoo testo ras tac nt e N t e D 4 The Main Character Library au aaa nana
172. enable you to map a printable character to each data byte value between 0 and 255 to select a character from ROM permanent memory or to download and select a character from RAM temporary memory Mapping a character to a data byte value re assigns the action the printer takes when it receives a data byte with that value For example if you map the letter A to data byte value 33 normally associated with the exclamation mark then each time the printer receives that data byte value an A is printed Note Remapping characters does not affect their use in control commands Current settings for all data byte values are stored in the data byte map The data byte map is a group of five maps in printer memory that describe the action the printer performs when it receives a data byte These maps are described below Data Byte Action Map Describes whether each data byte value between 0 and 255 is interpreted as a control code or a printable character Control Code Map Describes the control codes currently assigned to data byte values between 0 and 255 Character Source Map Character Library Map Character Number Map Operators Guide 147 Describes the location of the selected character library ROM or RAM Character sets and character maps selected from the configuration menu are stored in ROM Mapped characters originate in ROM so their source is ROM Download characters are downloaded directly to RAM so their so
173. ent is required only if it is broken bent or worn To change a forms compressor proceed as follows 1 Turn off printer and unplug the power cord 2 Open the operator access door 3 Note the setting of the printhead gap adjustment lever and then remove paper and ribbon cartridge If necessary see To remove a ribbon cartridge Page 100 4 Make sure the printhead gap adjustment lever is toward the front of the printer as far as possible Operators Guide 99 Printhead Forms Compressor Die p Se NOT Out Sensor Holder for Forms Compressor Forms Compressor Left End JBO AR1 5 Lift the forms compressor off the alignment tabs near both ends 6 Make sure the forms compressor clears the paper out sensor and then lift the forms compressor out of the printer 7 Slightly bend the new forms compressor as shown in the following illustration and slip past the printheads 8 As you push the forms compressor down keep it bent on the left side so that it clears the paper out sensor 100 Maintenance Installing a Forms Compressor JBO AS1 9 Tuck the bottom of the forms compressor into the holder at the bottom of the printer compartment and then adjust the forms compressor side to side so that it fits over the alignment tabs 10 Make sure that the paper out sensor protrudes through its hole in the forms compressor and recheck that the forms compressor is correctly positioned over the alignment tabs
174. er PRINT STYLE in the configuration menu Note Select a preferred characters per inch setting since vertical alignment varys slightly for different pitches 4 Select System Options in the configuration menu 5 See the Note below and then select Vertical Alignment Note Vertical alignment must be set at normal print speed As a safety feature when using fast pitch 10 pitch printing the printer prints at half speed if the operator access door is open To cancel half speed printing during vertical alignment press and hold TOF while the printer prints out the test patterns Operators Guide 105 The printer prints a two line pattern of vertical lines The top row of lines should be vertically in line with the bottom row Proper Vertical Alignment Back or Next to adjust Yes when done Improper Vertical Alignment l p Back or Next to adjust Yes when done LELLI If the top line is too far to the left as shown above press NEXT to move the top line to the right If the top line is too far to the right then press BACK to move the top print line to the left The printer prints out the result of the re alignment 5 Continue using BACK and NEXT to align the two lines 6 When finished with vertical alignment press YES to save the alignment and to proceed to the next configuration menu option 7 Press EXIT twice to leave the configuration menu 106 Maintenance Troubleshooting
175. erface The parallel interface connector is a standard Centronics type connector with 36 pins The triangular clips on the top and bottom of the connector are used to lock in the cable connector For more information on parallel connectivity see Appendix C Operators Guide 17 Serial Interface The serial interface connector is a standard RS 232 25 pin D type connector Normally thumbscrews attached to the cable connector are used to lock the cable connector to the printer connector For more information on serial connectivity see Appendix B BASIC BEEPS The beeper sounds to confirm a change or to flag an error or failure For errors and failures see Beeps Page 119 in the troubleshooting chart One chirp is heard when e Power up sequence test is successful e ONLINE is pressed One short beep is heard when the top of form is set 18 Basics Three sets of low high beeps are D D D heard when a paper jam occurs Four second solid beep is heard when e Paper runs out e Left tractor is too far right e Paper out sensor fails Intermittent single beeps are heard m when a string of bad data is k kk received on serial interface Except when in configuration menu mode Tum off printer to stop beeping Operators Guide 19 0000 One short beep followed by four oe ERE short long beeps indicates the printer has encountered a recoverable memory error t Five long beeps are heard when the
176. ers on the computer side The IBM PC AT uses a male 9 pin D type serial connector Also 386s 486s etc Operators Guide B 13 First the Signal Ground on the printer is tied to the Signal Ground on the IBM PC AT likewise the Frame Grounds on the printer and IBM PC AT are tied together Next RxD on the printer Pin 3 is tied to TxD Pin 3 on the IBM PC AT then TxD Pin 2 on the printer is tied to RxD Pin 2 on the IBM PC AT Lastly the control signals are connected DTR Pin 20 on the printer to DSR Pin 6 on the IBM PC AT and RTS Pin 4 on the printer to CTS Pin 8 on the IBM PC AT IBM AT PRINTER A DTE DEVICE Pin Signal Cable Signal Pin 1 FG FG SHELL 2 gt XD MM ID lt 3 8 lt RxD RxD gt 2 4 gt RTS ae RTS lt 7 5 lt CS CTS gt 8 6 lt DR DSR gt 6 7 SG SG 5 8 lt DCD S DCD gt 20 gt DIR DIR lt 4 IBM PC AT to Printer Wiring Diagram ABO AP B 14 Appendix B Serial Interface HANDSHAKING Handshaking controls the data flow across the serial interface Control of the data flow is necessary because it is possible for computers to send data faster than the printer can print The printer contains a data storage buffer to ease this potential problem but data flow control is necessary to totally eliminate the possibility of data loss T
177. ever as far as possible toward the front of the printer to open the gap as wide as possible between the platen and printheads Pull up all of the ribbon guides to remove them from their printheads Lift the cartridge straight up and out of the printer To install a ribbon cartridge proceed as follows Note Replacement ribbon cartridges include three ribbon guides The 1 three ribbon guides are only loosely attached to the ribbon If a ribbon guide has come off the ribbon see The Clean Way to Re attach a Ribbon Guide Page 103 Move the ribbon guides toward the center of the ribbon and make sure the ribbon is taut If necessary turn the ribbon feed wheel in the direction of the arrow until the ribbon is taut Insert the ribbon cartridge into the printer so that the tabs on the right and left ends of the ribbon cartridge slip through the slots provided in the operator access way Guide the tabs into the retaining slots provided at each end of the printer mechanism Operators Guide 95 Ribbon Cartridge Tabs E Left End Retaining Slot Installing Ribbon Cartridge Left End Vievv JBO AT Gently press down on the cartridge until it quietly snaps into place Be sure the ribbon is taut and then slip the ribbon guides onto the printheads Take up the slack again and then check the ribbon for twists Make sure that the ribbon is not obstructed or bound up at the cartridge s entrance and exit slots 96
178. f the print area When the print area is defined all existing tab positions are defined relative to the left edge of the print area Tabs retain their column reference numbers For example if no print area has been defined and tabs are set at Columns 8 16 and 24 and then if n1 is set to 12 and n2 is set to 96 the results are as follows e The left edge of the print area is 1 in right of the physical left edge of the paper The right edge of the print area is 8 in right of the left edge of the print area a total of 9 in from the physical left edge of the paper e The left margin is set 1 in plus one character width right of the physical left edge of the paper e The right margin is set 8 in minus one character width right of the left edge of the print area e Tabs are 1 in right of their previous position but remain numbered 8 16 and 24 If n1 or n2 is set to zero the previously defined print area remains in effect 284 DEC LA210 Control Commands If the new right margin is left of the current column and Auto VVraparound is enabled the next character is printed on a new line MISCELLANEOUS ESC 2 h Enable Linefeed Newline ASCII ESC 2 2 h Control CTRL 2 h Decimal 27 91 50 48 104 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 32 30 68 Returns the active column to the left margin when LF or VT is performed ESC 2 l Disable Linefeed Newline ASCII ESC 2 2 I Control CTRL 2 I Decimal
179. fect until the printer power is turned off or a new nonzero form length is set with ESC n t Operators Guide 287 BEL Bell ASCII BEL Control CTRLG Decimal 7 Hexadecimal 07 Sounds the beeper for approximately 0 1 second The printer accepts up to ten sequential BEL commands additional BEL commands are ignored CAN Cancel ASCII CAN Control CTRL X Decimal 24 Hexadecimal 18 Cancels any control function before it is finished When received in graphics mode CAN returns the printer to text mode ESC SP 7 Enable C1 Control Codes ASCII ESC SP 7 Control crR SP 7 Decimal 27 32 55 Hexadecimal 1B 20 37 Enables the printer to receive and interpret the C1 control codes decimal range 128 to 159 if upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu See the following command ESC SP 6 Disable C1 Control Codes ASCII ESC SP 6 Control CTRL SP 6 Decimal 27 32 54 Hexadecimal 1B 20 36 Causes the MSB in C1 control codes decimal range 128 to 159 to be set to 0 effectively mapping control functions to them to CO decimal range 000 to 031 288 DEC LA210 Control Commands Two groups of control codes may be active in the printer CO decimal range 000 to 031 and C1 decimal range 128 to 159 Control codes in CO are always active Control codes in C1 are enabled if upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting
180. feed Newline mode does not affect this command The active line is not modified The next form feed is measured from the last active line making the next top of form reference inaccurate Both commands perform the same function Partial Line Down PLD is valid only if the upper data bytes have been enabled by selecting 8 Bit DEC in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7 LF Linefeed ASCII LF Control CTRL J Decimal 10 Hexadecimal OA Advances the active line by one line When the active line is advanced past the bottom margin and above the top margin the active line is set to the next top margin If Linefeed Newline mode is enabled LF also returns the active column to the left margin LF does not change the active column 298 DEC LA210 Control Commands ESC n d Advance to Line n ASCII ESC I n d Control CTRL n d Decimal 27 91 n 100 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 64 Advances the active line to Line n When the active line is advanced past the bottom margin and above the next top margin the active line is set to the next top margin ESC n e Advance n Lines ASCII ESC n e Control CTRL n e Decimal 27 91 n 101 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 65 Advances the paper by n number of lines If n is 0 256 lines is assumed When the active line is advanced past the bottom margin and above the next top margin the active line is
181. function as linefeed LF If Auto Carriage Return CR on LF is enabled a carriage return is performed after VT 218 Epson FX 100 Control Commands ESC B Set Multiple Vertical Tabs ASCII ESC B n1 n16 NUL Control CTRL B n1 n16 CTRL Decimal 27 66 n1 n16 0 Hexadecimal 1B 42 n1 n16 00 Sets vertical tabs to the specified lines Note that this control command is terminated with a null byte n denotes the line number for each tab The valid entries for n are from 2 to the bottom line on the page as specified by the form length setting Send the values of n in ascending order An out of order tab value is interpreted as a terminator The tab positions set by ESC B are the same as those set by ESC b 0 vertical tab channel zero ESC B and ESC b clear all existing vertical tabs Therefore to add one tab you must include all existing tabs plus the new one Use ESC B or ESC b to set the tabs Use the Vertical Tab control code VT to cause the printer to tab to each subsequent tab Example REM SET VERTICAL TABS TO LINES 5 TO 10 LPRINT CHR 27 B CHR 5 CHR 10 CHR 0 ESC b Set Vertical Tab Channel ASCII ESC b m n1 n16 NUL Control CTRL b m n1 n16 CTRL Decimal 27 98 m n1 n16 0 Hexadecimal 1B 62 m n1 n16 00 Sets vertical tabs to the specified lines for the vertical tab Channel m Note that this control sequence is terminated
182. h ASCII ESC 3 n Control CTRL 3 n Decimal 27 51 n Hexadecimal 1B 33 n ASCII ESC J n Control cTRL J n Decimal 27 74 n Hexadecimal 1B 4A n Sets line spacing at n 216 in The valid entries for n are 1 to 255 n 216 in line spacing is approximated using 1 144 in steps Maximum local and cumulative error is 1 216 in e ESC 3 n causes all subsequent line spacing to be set at n 216 in e ESC J n prints all data in the print buffer clears the print buffer then advances the paper n 216 in one time only If Auto Carriage Return CR on LF is enabled ESC J causes a carriage return to be performed after the paper advances the amount specified by n The command ESC J is equivalent to a carriage return Note n 216 in line spacing is called Graphics Line Spacing by some manufacturers Use a line spacing of 24 216 in for bit image graphics using eight bits Example REM LPRINT Prints buffer amp advances paper 1 in LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 74 CHR 216 Operators Guide 237 ESC X Set Horizontal Margins ASCII ESC AX n1 n2 Control CTRL X n1 n2 Decimal 27 88 n1 n2 Hexadecimal 1B 58 n1 n2 Sets the left margin to Column n1 and the right margin to Column n2 Specify margins in character positions at the pitch currently in use Margins are stored in absolute displacements from the left edge of the paper If n1 is 0 the current left margin is used
183. h control sequence ESC n t The bottom margin is reset to its maximum value determined by form length if the form length setting is changed Changing the lines per inch does not affect the bottom margin setting ESC n1 n2 r Top and Bottom Margin ASCII ESC n1 n2 r Control CTRL n1 n2 r Decimal 27 91 n1 59 n2 114 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n1 3B n2 72 Sets the top margin to Line n1 and the bottom margin to Line n2 The top margin is reset to Line 1 and the bottom margin to its maximum value determined by form length if the form length is changed Changing the lines per inch does not affect the top or bottom margin settings The following sets the top and bottom margins at 1 in assuming an 11 in form at 6 lines per in Example LPRINT CHR 27 6 60r Operators Guide 283 ESC n1 n2 s Set Print Area ASCII ESC n1 n2 E S Control CTRL n1 f n2 S Decimal 27 91 n1 59 n2 34 115 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n1 3B n2 22 73 Sets the print area to the position specified by n1 and n2 The left edge of the print area is the position n1 12 in from the physical left edge of the paper The right edge of the print area is the position n2 12 in to the right of the left edge The left margin is placed one character width to the right of the left edge of the print area The right margin is placed one character width to the left of the right edge o
184. haracter inserted With UPC EAN and Interleaved 2 of 5 spaces can be added just as you would between keyboard characters For example 012345678905 lt space gt 01234567895 Before adding spaces between PostNet and Codabar barcodes however you must use either a horizontal tab ASCII decimal 9 or a comma ASCII decimal 44 to terminate the preceding barcode For example to add one space between two Codabar barcodes the barcode expression must be written either as 012345678905 lt space gt 012345678905 or 012345678905 lt HT gt lt space gt 012345678905 E 14 Appendix E Barcodes POSTNET PLACEMENT ON AN ENVELOPE Placement of a USPS PostNet Zip 4 Delivery Point barcode on an envelope is regulated by the U S Postal Service PostNet barcode positioning on a standard size business envelope shown in the accompanying illustration was correct at the time this manual was printed The following BASIC program Epson emulation prints the PostNet barcode for 99212 1381 with delivery point code of 10 in the position indicated in the illustration 100 104 108 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 LPRINT CHR 1 AzM CHR 21 CHR 0 LPRINT CHR 0 CHR 0 CHR 0 CHR 0 LPRINT CHR 0 CHR 0 LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT LPRINT CHR 27 l CHR 50 LPRINT Name LPRINT Address LPRIN
185. haracter libraries This process of creating and modifying characters sets is shown graphically on Page D 8 D 4 Appendix D Character Sets TERMINOLOGY Terminology used to describe character sets varies widely between IBM Epson and DEC Terminology used in this manual is internally consistent and follows standard usage where possible The terminology used to describe character sets is defined below Character A printable pattern composed of dots Letters numbers punctuation marks graphic shapes and all other symbols are characters A blank space is also a valid character Character Library A defined group of printable characters stored in the printer The printer contains one main ROM based character library when shipped from the factory Character Source The location of character libraries ROM or RAM Control Code A single byte of information that starts stops or modifies printer action Mapping Process of assigning characters and control codes to data bytes Character Set A complete assignment of control codes and printable characters for all data bytes Code Page A predefined IBM character map Character Map An assignment of printable characters used in creating a character set Control Code Map An assignment of control codes used in creating a character set Operators Guide D 5 THE MAIN CHARACTER LIBRARY Pages D 9 and D 10 show all of the printer s printable draft and NLQ characters These con
186. haracters cannot be remapped Maps created using this command are stored until power off printer reset or until overwritten by other selections Selecting a character set or changing emulation mode overwrites current selections 152 Universal Control Commands See Appendix D for charts of standard character sets and the character library Example REM REMAP CHARACTERS G THROUGH K TO DATA BYTE VALUES REM ASSOCIATED WITH CHARACTERS A THROUGH E LPRINT CHR 1 AzBGK CHR 65 CHR 0 CHR 66 CHR 0 LPRINT CHR 67 CHR 0 CHR 68 CHR 0 CHR 69 CHR 0 LPRINT ABCDEFGHIJK RESULT ABCDEFABCDE Operators Guide 153 DOWNLOAD CHARACTERS Using the download character command SOH Az amp you can design special symbols or graphic patterns or create a custom alphabet The following pages describe how to e Define and download characters of your own design e Store the characters e Select and accept the characters for printing When you map a character as shown earlier you re assign a printable character that is stored in the printer to a data byte value between 0 and 255 The printer supplies the character data the shape size and style of the character as well as the intercharacter space When you download a character you supply the character data as well as map it to a specific data byte value You are not limited to characters within the printer s character library You can create whatever printable shape you
187. he P1 through P8 bytes are the values of the parameters of the command Valid entries for each parameter are shown in the table below E 22 Appendix E Barcodes Parameter Options Setting P1 Barcode Type 0 Interleaved 2 of 5 See Note 1 1 PostNet Graphics Mode 4 Code 39 default 5 EAN 8 6 EAN 13 9 Codabar a a 10 Codabar b b 11 Codabar c c 12 Codabar d d 13 UPC A 14 UPC E 21 PostNet Text Mode P2 Barcode Height 0 3 4 in default n 12 in n 1 to 120 Disable Enable default or 1 014 in default 027 in 014 0133 n 1 in 014 in 027 in or 3 040 in default 054 in 014 0133 n 1 in 014 in default 027 in 014 0133 n 1 in 014 in 027 in 040 in default 054 in 014 0133 n 1 in 014 in default 027 in 014 0133 n 1 in P3 Human Readable Line P4 Narrow Bar Width P5 Wide Bar Width P6 Narrow Space Width P7 Wide Space Width o S 99 o A P8 Intercharacter Gap See Note 2 3 NOJ KON SNOS KON SNO OS o s Note 1 Codabar a a bib and so forth refer to start and stop characters 2 Intercharacter gap is adjustable only for Code 39 and Codabar barcode symbols For n z O Operators Guide E 23 P4 THROUGH P8 INTEGRITY The tables that follow specify how parameters P4 P5 P6 P7 and P8 must relate to each other if you must make parameter adjustments using the Bar
188. he printer provides two kinds of handshaking e Software handshaking e Hardware handshaking SOFTWARE HANDSHAKING Software handshaking occurs when a device controls data flow using the content of the data itself The printer supports two software handshaking protocols e X ON X OFF e ETX ACK X ON X OFF X ON X OFF is commonly used when printers control the handshake The printer accepts characters until its input buffer is nearly full at which time it initiates the handshake by sending a turn off character X OFF back to the computer When the computer receives this character it stops transmitting data When the input buffer is nearly empty the printer sends a turn on character X ON to the computer Upon receipt of this character the computer resumes sending characters Operators Guide B 15 In the configuration menu you may select whether the printer sends an X ON every 20 seconds during periods when it is ready to receive data called robust or only once X ON is ASCII character decimal number 17 and X OFF is ASCII character decimal number 19 These are sometimes referred to as device control 1 DC1 and device control 3 DC3 respectively ETX ACK ETX ACK is a commonly used when computers control the handshake The computer sends its characters line by line After each line is sent the computer puts in an END OF TEXT character ETX When the printer is ready to receive the next line of data it sends an ACKNO
189. he right side of the matrix Descending characters are printed by the bottom eight pins of the printhead Operators Guide 165 The sum of the values in Column 1 is the c1 value the sum of the values in Column 2 is the c2 value and so forth Where no character data are entered in the matrix enter zero as the c value for that column 166 Universal Control Commands EXAMPLE 1 The example shows how to define and download the copyright symbol Intercharacter Space LL cues 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Characters Cell Values 128 Descending Characters e N a 32 O o E o e o DX se T 2 e os 4 Not used 1 Column 60 66 153 165 165 66 60 0 0 0 Totals ABO W1 The following BASIC program downloads this character to data byte value 35 decimal and select it for printing LPRINT CHR 1 Az amp CHR 1 CHR 35 CHR 35 CHR 0 CHR 0 FOR X 1 TO 10 READ Y LPRINT CHR Y NEXT X DATA 60 66 153 165 165 66 60 0 0 0 Operators Guide 167 EXAMPLE 2 This example shows how to define and download a shaded character The matrix below shows how to determine the data When a shaded character is specified ag 2 or 130 Rows 6 7 and 8 are copied into three additional rows 10 through 12 to produce the result shown in the matrix on the next page c1 through cx are specified for the first 8 rows only not for Rows 10 11
190. high data transfer from the computer to the printer is prevented BUSY is set high when a character is strobed into the parallel port and set low when a byte has been read This signal works together with the ACKNLG signal PAPER OUT A high signal indicates the printer is out of paper The signal comes directly from the printer s paper out switch through a buffer The buffer also drives the PAPER indicator on the switch panel Parallel Interface Pin Assignments Operators Guide C 5 Signal Pin and Signal Name Description Direction ON LINE When high this signal indicates the printer is on line and ready to accept data if not busy 0v Logic GROUND level NC Not used 0v Logic GROUND level CHASSIS GND Must be connected to computer chassis to ensure proper printer operation Connect to printer chassis not to signal ground 45 VOLTS Supplies power for external devices The current is limited to 74 a to prevent heavy loads on the power supply Some computers provide 5 v on this pin This may cause the printer to appear on after the power switch has been turned off The indicator lights remain lit but the printer beeps if printing is attempted In this case you should open Pin 18 in the cable STROBE RET Pins 19 through 30 are GROUND level returns for DATA 1 RET Pins DATA 2 RET 1 through 12 DATA 3 RET DATA 4 RET DATA 5 RET DATA 6 RET Parallel Interface Pin Assignments continued C 6 Appendix C
191. his parameter specifies the width of the wide bars in a barcode symbol The valid entries for P5 are 1 0 014 in 2 0 027 in 0 or 3 0 040 in default value 4 0 054 in n 0 014 0 0133 n 1 for n 0 E 8 Appendix E Barcodes P6 Narrow Space Width This parameter specifies the width of the narrow spaces in a barcode symbol The valid entries for P6 are 0 or 1 0 014 in default value 2 0 027 in n 0 014 0 0133 n 1 for n 0 P7 Wide Space Width This parameter specifies the width of the wide spaces in a barcode symbol The valid entries for P7 are 1 0 014 in 2 0 027 in 0 or 3 0 040 in default value 4 0 054 in n 0 014 0 0133 n 1 for n 0 P8 Intercharacter Gap This parameter allows you to adjust the gap between adjacent character representations in Code 39 and Codabar barcode symbols The adjustment does not affect the other barcode styles The valid entries for P8 are 0 or 1 0 014 in default value 2 0 027 in n 0 014 0 0133 n 1 for n 0 Operator s Guide E 9 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND EXAMPLE The example below shows the barcode format command for a 3 4 in high UPC E barcode symbol with no human readable line Default values are used for narrow and wide bar and space widths The last parameter intercharacter gap does not affect UPC E barcode symbols but must be sent with the other parameters The command could be sent with the following program LPRINT C
192. ht ESC S remains in effect until ESC T is received Multiple ESC S n commands may be sent prior to an ESC T Note This function works only if Sub Superscript is enabled from the configuration menu ESCT Cancel Subscript Superscript ASCII ESC T Control cTARL T Decimal 27 84 Hexadecimal 1B 54 Cancels subscript superscript set by ESC S ESC 4 Set Italics ASCII ESC 4 Control cTRL 4 Decimal 27 52 Hexadecimal 1B 34 Allows most upright draft quality or NLQ style condensed bold enlarged single double strike to be printed in italics Epson italic characters reside in the upper half of the Epson character sets ESC 4 causes this upper half to be mapped to the lower bytes ESC 5 Cancel Italics 216 X Epson FX 100 Control Commands ASCII ESC 5 Control cTRL 5 Decimal 27 53 Hexadecimal 1B 35 Cancels italics Print returns to previous upright style ESC D Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs ASCII ESC D n1 n32 NUL Control CTRL D n1 n32 CTRL Decimal 27 68 n1 n32 0 Hexadecimal 1B 44 n1 n32 00 Sets multiple horizontal tabs A maximum of 32 tabs may be set with one command Note that this control command is terminated with a null byte This command clears all existing horizontal tabs Therefore to add one tab you must include all existing tabs plus the new one ESC D only sets the tabs The Horizontal Tab cont
193. ical Tab Set Multiple Vertical Tabs Set Vertical Tab Channel Select Vertical Tab Channel ESC n SI or ESC SI DC2 ESCM ESCP SO or ESC SO DC4 ESC W n ESC x n ESCG ESC H ESCE ESC F ESC n ESC S n ESC T ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC D n1 n32 NUL HT VT ESC B n1 n16 NUL ESC b m n1 n16 NUL ESC n 218 219 220 221 221 222 223 224 225 226 226 226 226 227 228 228 228 228 229 230 230 231 231 232 Operators Guide 181 ALPHABETICAL SUMMARY Command Function Page Command Function Page BEL X Bel 19 ESCG DoueStike 213 BS Backspace 200 ESCH Cancel Double Strike 213 CAN Cancel Data in Print Buffer 201 ESCI Control Codes Printable Characters 185 CR Carriage Return 199 JJESCJ n 216 Inch Line Spacing 196 DC1 Select Printer 202 ESCK Single Density Graphics 188 DC2 Cancel Condensed Pitch 207 ESCL Double Density Graphics 191 DC3 Deselect Printer on Serial Port 202 ESCM Select Elite Pitch 208 DC4 Cancel Enlarged Pitch 210 ESCN Skip Over Perforation 198 DEL Delete Last Character 201 ESCO Cancel Skip Over Perforation 198 ESC Set Pitch and Strike 205 ESCP Cancel Elite Pitch 208 ESC Cancel MSB Control 203 ESCQ Set Right Margin 197 ESC Graphics Mode Selection 194 ESCR National Use Character Maps 183 ESC Set Cancel Underline 214 ESCS Set Subscript Superscript 215 ESC Select Vertical Tab Channel 219 ESCSI Condensed Pitch 206 ESCO 1 8 Inch Line Spac
194. icized Note Optical character recognition OCR fonts cannot be bolded Italics Pressing YES prints out the active setting e Off factory default e On Off The printer prints standard upright characters On The printer prints italicized characters Italicized characters appear slanted Italicized characters can be bolded To make a bolded character from a normal weight character the printer simply prints another image of the character slightly to the right of the first 10 Configuration Note Characters can only be italicized in the Epson emulation Also barcodes and optical character recognition OCR fonts cannot be italicized Subscript Superscript Pressing YES enables you to include subscripts and superscripts in your text Subscript and superscript printing slightly affects overall print speed Char Inch Pressing YES prints out the active pitch characters printed per horizontal inch 5 0 6 0 7 5 8 33 8 57 9 1 10 0 factory default 12 0 15 0 16 67 17 14 18 2 Note Although optical character recognition OCR characters can be printed in any pitch OCR character are normally used in 10 pitch only Operators Guide 71 Slash Zero Pressing YES prints out e Off e On factory default Off The printer prints zeroes without a slash On The printer prints zeroes with a slash Note Optical character recognition OCR zeroes cannot be slashed FORMS OPTIONS Pres
195. ificance as a unit There are 256 possible patterns of zeros and ones in an 8 bit data byte so there are 256 unique data bytes Individual data bytes are identified by a number related to the pattern of zeros and ones There are different conventions for assigning meaning to individual data bytes In the 4100 printer two different conventions are used 124 Universal Control Commands e n Epson and IBM Proprinter XL emulations the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII is used e n DEC emulations American National Standards Institute ANSI standards are used Aspects of these standards relevant to the emulations contained in the 4100 printer are described in this section IDENTIFYING DATA BYTES Individual data bytes can be identified using one of several number systems This section describes three number systems in common use e Binary e Decimal e Hexadecimal Three number systems are used because each has advantages in specific situations Some understanding of these number systems is beneficial when working with printers Operators Guide 125 BINARY NUMBER SYSTEM Computers use the binary number system In the binary base two number system we count from zero 0 to one 1 and then start over again All other numbers are expressed using only these two digits The pattern of zeros and ones in a data byte can be interpreted as a binary number The bit pattern 00001110 can be interpreted as
196. inches n must be from 1 to 22 The default is 11 in The current form position becomes the top of form when the printer receives this command If the bottom margin was previously set by the Skip Over Perforation command ESC N the Length of Form in Inches command cancels the bottom margin setting Therefore to re establish the bottom margin after Length of Form in Inches is set send another Skip Over Perforation command Example REM SET FORM LENGTH TO 10 INCHES LPRINT CHR 27 C CHR 0 CHR 10 188 Epson FX 100 Control Commands ESCK Single Density Graphics ASCII ESC K n1 n2 d1 d816 Control CTRL K n1 n2 d1 d816 Decimal 27 75 n1 n2 d1 d816 Hexadecimal 1B 4B n1 n2 d1 d816 Causes the printer to print single density graphics dot columns Single density graphics are printed 60 dot columns per horizontal inch n1 and n2 specify the number of dot columns data bytes to reserve for graphics The maximum number of dot columns per line for single density graphics is 816 n1 and n2 are calculated as follows ni XMOD 9256 e n2 INT X 256 where X equals the number of dot columns to reserve For example if the number of dot columns is 80 80 MOD 256 80 INT 80 256 0 e ni e n2 d1 d816 are decimal numbers from 0 to 255 each representing a dot column Each decimal number has a corresponding 8 bit binary expression The bits set to logic 1 in the bi
197. ing 195 ESCSO Enlarged Pitch 209 ESC 1 7 72 Inch Line Spacing 195 ESC T Cancel Subscript Superscript 215 ESC 2 1 6 Inch Line Spacing 195 ESC U Unidirectional Bidirectional Printing 204 ESC 3 n 216 Inch Line Spacing 196 ESC W Set Cancel Enlarged Pitch 211 ESC 4 Set Italics 215 ESC Y Double Density Graphics 191 ESC 5 Cancel Italics 215 ESC Z Quad Density Graphics 193 ESC 6 Select IBM Character Set 2 184 ESC b Set Vertical Tab Channel 218 ESC 7 Select IBM Character Set 1 184 Esc Set Left Margin 197 ESO g N e 204 JESCS Half Speed Printing 201 ESC Clear MeD 203 ESC x Set Cancel NLQ 212 ESC gt Set MSB 203 FF Form Feed 200 ESC Printer Initialization 199 HT Horizontal Tab 217 ESC A n 72 Inch Line Spacing 195 LF Linefeed 200 ESC B Set Multiple Vertical Tabs 218 S Condensed Pitch 206 ESC C Set Length of Form by Line 186 SO Enlarged Pitch 209 ESC C NUL Set Length of Form in Inches 187 VT Vertical Tab 217 ESC D Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs 216 ESC E Emphasized Mode Bold Strike ON 213 ESC F Emphasized Mode Bold Strike OFF 213 182 Epson FX 100 Control Commands UNAVAILABLE EPSON FX 100 CONTROL COMMANDS The following commands are not available in Epson emulation mode ESC EM ESC SP ESC ESC amp ESC 8 ESC 9 ESC ESC ESC ESC p Cut Sheet Feeder Mode Intercharacter Space User Defined Character Set Define User Defined Characters Disable Paper End Detector Enable Paper End Detec
198. ing requirements See Paper Requirements Width Bond Weight Single Part Paper 3 0 to 16 0 in 14 to 28 Ib 52 to 105 g m Multipart Part 3 0 to 16 0 in 11 to 21 Ib Paper 40 to 80 g m Each Sheet Total thickness must not exceed 0 007 in 0 18 mm based on width range of 3 0 to 16 0 in with no trimming See Label Requirements Menu Selectable 6 to 8 Ipi Universal control Commands 144 to 144 170 lpi Epson IBM Control Commands 216 to 216 255 Ipi DEC Control Commands 2 3 4 6 8 or 12 lpi Switch Panel e in 1 8 in 1 144 in Universal Control Commands 144 in n 1 to 170 Epson IBM Control Commands 216 in n 1 to 255 DEC Control Commands 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 in Varies among first middle and last parts Operators Guide A 5 CHARACTERISTICS CONTINUED Paper Feed continued Line Feed Forward in linefeed increment specified above 1 144 in Direction increments in reverse direction Form Length 0 5 to 31 5 in 12 7 to 800 mm in 0 5 in increments using menu Also 420 mm 297 mm 210 mm 148 5 mm and 1193 in Slevv Rate Selectable 11 or 5 in per second Type Nylon ribbon 1 2 in wide black Cartridge Disposable full carriage length cassette approx 3 in x 4 in x 20 in Clean hands installation Ribbon Life 6 million draft mode characters Epson FX 100 IBM Proprinter XL DEC LA210 Character Sets Control Code Maps Standard Epson Map IBM
199. initiates the same process as turning the printer on The printer functions as specified by the configuration menu ESC also cancels the print line of characters in which it occurs CR Carriage Return ASCII CR Control CTRL M Decimal 13 Hexadecimal 0D Prints any data stored in the print buffer and sets the current column position to the left margin If Auto Linefeed LF on CR is enabled a linefeed is performed after the carriage return BEL Bell ASCII BEL Control CTRL G Decimal 7 Hexadecimal 07 Sounds the beeper once for approximately 0 1 second 200 Epson FX 100 Control Commands BS Backspace ASCII BS Control CTRL H Decimal 8 Hexadecimal 08 Prints any data in the print buffer then backs up one column for the next starting position This is used to create overstrike characters If you have changed the character pitch before sending the BS control code the distance the printer backs up may be inaccurate LF Linefeed ASCII LF Control CTRL J Decimal 10 Hexadecimal 0A Prints any data in the print buffer and advances the paper one line If Auto Carriage Return CR on LF is enabled a carriage return is performed after the linefeed This control code cancels control code SO FF Form Feed ASCII FF Control CTRL L Decimal 12 Hexadecimal 0C Prints any data in the print buffer and advances the paper to the next
200. int buffer and advances the paper to the next top of form A carriage return is performed after the form feed This control code cancels control code SO Operators Guide 241 ESC 4 Set Top of Form ASCII ESC 4 Control cTRL 4 Decimal 27 52 Hexadecimal 1B 34 Sets the current paper position as the top of form CAN Cancel Data in Print Buffer ASCII CAN Control CTRL X Decimal 24 Hexadecimal 18 Cancels all data currently in the print buffer If Auto Carriage Return CR on LF is enabled the left margin becomes the current print position DC1 Select Printer ASCII DC1 Control CTRL Q Decimal 17 Hexadecimal 11 Sets the printer to accept data from the computer after it has been deselected by ESC Q 22 in the serial mode This code does not place the printer on line if it has been placed off line by pressing ON LINE DC1 is the X ON character See Appendix B for details regarding software handshaking 242 IBM Proprinter Control Commands ESC Q 22 Deselect Printer ASCII ESC Q 22 Control CTRL Q 22 Decimal 27 81 22 Hexadecimal 1B 51 16 Sets the printer so it will not accept data from the computer This control command is intended for diagnostic purposes only The printer remains in the off line state until Select Printer DC1 is received and cannot be reselected by pressing ON LINE DC3 Deselect Printer on Serial Port ASCII
201. inter automatically leaves a 1 2 in white space before and after the TOF setting Consider using the on setting when printing unformatted straight ASCII text LF on CR Pressing YES prints out e Off factory default e On Note Regardless of this setting the printer automatically performs a printer supplied line feed and carriage return when the output line buffer is full Off The printer does not supply a line feed command after it executes a carriage return command sent from the computer This is the preferred setting since most computer software applications supply all vertical positioning commands 74 Configuration On The printer automatically supplies a line feed for every carriage return command from the computer Sometimes referred to as Auto Line Feed CR on LF Pressing YES prints out e Off e On factory default Note Regardless of this setting the printer automatically performs a printer supplied line feed and carriage return when the line buffer is full Off The printer does not automatically supply a carriage return command after it executes a line feed command sent from the computer On The printer automatically supplies a carriage return for every line feed command from the computer Sometimes referred to as Auto Carriage Return This is the preferred setting since most modern software applications assume that line feeds cause the printer to print out the line of text empty its
202. inting in single strike ESC Set Cancel Underline ASCII ESC n Control CTRL n Decimal 27 45 n Hexadecimal 1B 2D n Sets and cancels the underline function n specifies whether the function is set or cancelled as follows e n 1or49 Set underline function e n Oor48 Cancel underline function Example REM SET UNDERLINE FUNCTION LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 1 LPRINT Underline function is on REM CANCEL UNDERLINE FUNCTION LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 0 LPRINT Underline function is off 252 IBM Proprinter Control Commands ESC S Set Subscript Superscript ASCII ESC S n Control cm S n Decimal 27 83 n Hexadecimal 1B 53 n Prints characters following this control command as subscript or superscript characters n specifies either subscript or superscript e n 1or49 Select subscript e n Oor48 Select superscript Subscript or superscript characters are printed at normal height ESC S remains in effect until ESC T is received Multiple ESC S n commands may be sent prior to an ESC T Note This function works only if Sub Superscript is enabled from the configuration menu ESC T Cancel Subscript Superscript ASCII ESC T Control cTAL T Decimal 27 84 Hexadecimal 1B 54 Cancels subscript superscript set by ESC S Operators Guide 253 ESCD Set Multiple Horizontal Tabs ASCII ESC D n1 n32 NUL Control CTRL D n1 n32 CTRL O De
203. inting out the report or making the default setting change Also in the case of a default change the change also is made to the current active printer settings For example if you answer YES to the Char Inch change Page 75 from 10 to 12 the change is in effect when you leave the configuration menu Operators Guide 49 EXITING THE CONFIGURATION MENU There are three ways to exit the configuration menu J E T e e Press EXIT until the printer advances to the next top of form e Turn off the printer D f BE ON LINE EXIT Press ONLINE along with LINE FEED ON LINE LF EXIT YES If you have made default setting changes the new default selections take effect immediately after exiting the configuration menu or when the printer is turned on again If it becomes necessary to return to the factory defaults after configuration changes have been made the configuration menu includes an option called Factory Reset which restores the factory default settings See Factory Reset Page 87 50 Configuration ADJUSTING THE PRINTER S PERFORMANCE The best method for adjusting the printer s performance to match your needs is to 1 Make interface changes physical printer connections 2 Make emulation changes printer behavior IBM Epson or DEC 3 Make other changes software and printer configuration menu settings The subsections that follow discuss the options and
204. ional not implemented Signal Ground SG OO ONON KON RS 422 A TxD TxD 422 optional not implemented gt RS 422 A TxD TxD 422 optional not implemented Auxiliary DTR Same as Pin 20 RS 422 A RxD optional not implemented Auxiliary DTR Same as Pin 20 Data Terminal Ready High until buffer fills then low Technically not an RS 232 C signal See DTR Polarity under Serial Options in the configuration menu See Handshaking later in this appendix for more information RxD on Pin 3 is used as the differential complement RxD 422 of this signal line B 8 Appendix B Serial Interface MAKING A SERIAL CABLE Interfacing two RS 232 C serial devices is simply a process of connecting grounds and tying together the output and input signal pairs The wiring diagrams on Page B 10 list the nine most commonly used RS 232 C serial interface signals and their pins versus the pin assignments on DCE and DTE devices Most computers are DTE devices Most modems repeaters and translators are DCE Connections that are usually required appear as solid lines Connections that are normally optional appear as dashed lines The full compliment of connections is sufficient for the majority of situations For special cases consult your device s technical reference manual Serial connectors come in two genders male and female A female connector is mounted on the printer Use a male connector on the prin
205. ional use multilingual or VT100 line draw maps and then how those maps are selected for the lower and upper data bytes of the character set 8 Bit Character Set in Use 7 Bit Character Set in Use Qs ESCo Qs Q ESCn Q so ESC Q so ESCo GESn ESC Esc Mapping Character q 86 Ec Sn Esc BEN ES Sn UN tw Available Character Maps Available Character Maps DEC LA210 Emulation Character Mapping ABO AJ Operators Guide 271 Character maps for DEC LA210 may be selected using the configuration menu or with control commands Differences between these methods are described below Using the Configuration Menu to Select Character Maps Using the configuration menu you can select character maps GO G1 G2 and G3 for the 7 bit or 8 bit DEC character set Different character maps may be selected Character map GO can be mapped only into the lower data bytes Character maps G1 through G3 can be mapped into either or both the lower and upper data bytes The character maps selected for GO and G2 become active when you turn on the printer The character maps selected for G1 and G3 may be invoked using the commands shown in this section Using Control Commands to Select Character Maps Using the control commands shown on the following pages you can assign any character map to GO through G3 The assignments are active when mapped into the lower or upper data bytes using the mapping commands shown in this section Ch
206. it is called a number system character In EAN 13 barcodes the second character is a country flag The number system character and the country flag for EAN 13 barcodes must be sent to the printer along with the other characters in the code It is the first digit of the code Operator s Guide E 17 START CHARACTERS STOP CHARACTERS AND GUARD BARS You do not need to supply start and stop characters or guard bars for UPC and EAN codes with the barcode They are automatically appended by the printer SUMMARY OF REQUIRED BARCODE DATA The table below summarizes the data the printer must receive for each barcode symbol A e indicates required data An asterisk indicates optional data A blank space indicates the data are automatically calculated and appended or are not applicable for that barcode style No Country No of Total Barcode Start System Flag Significant Stop Check No of Style Char Char Char Char Char Digit Char Code 39 Interleaved 20f5 see note Codabar Styles 9 12 UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 PostNet Note For Interleaved 2 of 5 barcode symbols if an even number of characters is not sent the printer appends a leading zero E 18 Appendix E Barcodes END BARCODE COMMAND The End Barcode command terminates the printing of barcode symbols The printer returns to printing characters in the font style in place prior to receipt of the Start Barcode command End Barcode
207. ith control commands Also in the DEC LA210 emulation vertical pitch is a term that refers to the number of lines per in PLATEN The hard surface behind the paper that allows the printhead pins and ribbon to cause an impression on the paper PRINTABLE CHARACTER A printable dot pattern letters numbers punctuation marks graphic shapes and all other symbols that can be printed as a unit within a single cell PRINTER EMULATION When a printer is set to respond to the commands of another brand of printer it is said to emulate that printer The printer can be set to emulate the Epson FX 100 IBM Proprinter XL or DEC LA210 PRINTHEAD One of three devices each containing nine vertically aligned pins that cause strike on impressions on the paper PRINTHEAD GAP The distance between the printheads and the platen PROTOCOL Same as HANDSHAKING RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY RAM This is the printer s memory which stores downloaded character and control data and incoming print jobs The printer contains a 32K x 8 bit volatile RAM Volatile RAM loses its character and control data when printer power is turned off The microprocessor contains nonvolatile RAM NVRAM to retain configuration default settings during periods when the printer is off G 6 Glossary READ ONLY MEMORY ROM The printer s permanent memory For the 4100 printer ROM is the same as ELECTRONICALLY PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY SERIAL INTERFACE Physical and l
208. itself as the binary number 00001110 Thus each data byte can be numbered uniquely for a total of 256 unique bytes The number or value of the data byte can also be expressed in other number systems including the decimal and hexadecimal systems DECIMAL NUMBER SYSTEM The decimal number system is the most common number system In the decimal base ten number system counts from zero 0 to nine 9 and then starts over again All other numbers are expressed using these ten digits The 256 unique data bytes in the binary system can also be identified with decimal numbers For example the data byte with pattern 00001110 can be identified by binary number 00001110 and by decimal number 14 Both numbers identify the same data byte The decimal number system is used in this manual to identify data bytes unless explicitly stated otherwise 126 Universal Control Commands HEXADECIMAL NUMBER SYSTEM The hexadecimal hex number system is used in the computer industry because its relationship to the binary number system allows convenient notation In the hexadecimal base sixteen number system counts from zero 0 to fifteen 15 and then starts over again The sixteen digits are represented by the numbers zero 0 through nine 9 and the letters A through F All other numbers are represented using these sixteen characters The 256 unique data bytes in the binary system can be identified with either decimal or hexadecimal numbers For ex
209. l ASCII ESC Control CTRL Decimal 27 35 Hexadecimal 1B 23 Cancels MSB control enforced by ESC or ESC gt Causes the printer to return to the left margin then print from left to right for one line only 204 Epson FX 100 Control Commands PRINT DIRECTION ESC One Line Unidirectional Printing ASCII ESC lt Control CTRL lt Decimal 27 60 Hexadecimal 1B 3C Causes the printer to return to the left margin then print from left to right for one line only Note f set to ON PRINT STYLE BiDirectional Graphics NLQ in the configuration menu overrides unidirectional printing ESCU Unidirectional Bidirectional Printing ASCII ESC U n Control cTRL U n Decimal 27 85 n Hexadecimal 1B 55 n Causes the printer to print unidirectionally or bidirectionally as indicated by n e n 1or49 Unidirectional printing e n Oor48 Bidirectional printing When unidirectional printing is selected data is printed only when the printhead is moving from left to right Printing this way improves vertical character alignment When bidirectional printing is selected data is printed when the printhead is moving in both directions This is the default print mode Note If set to ON PRINT STYLE Bi Directional Graphics NLQ in the configuration menu overrides unidirectional printing Operators Guide 205 PRINT STYLE ESC Set Pitch and Strike ASCII ESC n
210. led in Changing Emulations that follows When you use a specific computer application MS Windows WordPerfect Lotus 1 2 3 etc to print on a specific printer Epson FX 100 IBM Proprinter XL etc you must select a specific printer driver The application s printer driver not only allows you to print on that printer it also allows you to select such things as print quality NLQ draft normal vs bold print characters per inch character sets and others features and options available with the emulated printer These printer driver selections override the configuration menu default selections Remember If you change the emulation of your printer you must change the selected printer driver in your computer application Consult the manuals provided with your application Operators Guide 33 CHANGING EMULATIONS The factory default startup emulation is Epson FX 100 which means that the printer acts like an Epson FX 100 printer after you turn on the power You can change the default startup emulation using the configuration menu The other two emulation selections are IBM Proprinter XL and DEC LA210 To change emulations use a power up or on line hot key to enter the configuration menu 1 Either press FORM FEED and then turn on the printer JI 49 BACK OS gt C or with the printer already on press and hold ON LINE and then simultaneously press FORM FEED and LINE FEED pus CINE 4D a EXIT BACK YES
211. library are done using universal control commands Process of Creating Character Sets Operators Guide D 9 aman BEEN alah 3 GLER ash i awh Aah math sth Q7 uh BAAN Qe AAA apah ACh ADN 4 t S Pe RY LEBAT OU RA ma Z O12 jj 89114223 SABRCDEFGHI HLPMNO PORSTUVMWXYZEXI abcdefghiijklimno paqeretuvixymxtt i a ub iqag Bortias cr dern Q iH i imi li Jg es agd 4 NGAME E SK ie 8 AAA ASOEERIYTIIYE H OP Ba Sa DONI 1 e e WAONE yet tet et wA w dE LG m Ligh gt Leah i39h SE epee ati A d EH AX eae at SIM E 2x p bye 70123456 188h S 758096 ABCDEFGHIZI U Leah gt LAN OR GRS TUVEEAY 2 LAB T2 7012343679090 ish iRah ACENPSTVX dg Main Character Library Upright Draft Characters JBO BG1 D 10 Appendix D Character Sets 328 336 352 368 384 49 414 432 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt uo gt gt 3 gt gt gt gt gt m 175 191 287 223 239 255 271 287 383 319 335 351 367 383 399 415 431 442 Bh g18h 28h 838h 48h gagh Agh 5765h B868h 98h BASH B R gC8h BDgh BEG g8F h 18gh 118h t28h 138h 148h 138h 149h 178h 188h 198h LASh 1B h GEFh gIFh Barh B3Fh g4Fh gsrh g 6Fh 87Fh g8Fh g9Fh GAFh BFh CFh gDFh BEFh gFFh 1gFh LiFh 12Fh 1 3Fh 14Fh 5Fh 146Fh 17Fh 1
212. mbers are located on the back of the printer Use the following questions to begin to identify the problem with the printer 1 Ifthe printer is not doing anything is it on line turned on plugged in If no power also check fuses Page 107 and the wall receptacle If the POWER indicator is not lit see Switch Panel Page 127 in the troubleshooting chart 2 Is the ON LINE indicator lit If not run the power up sequence test by simply turning off and then turning on the printer See Power Up Sequence Test Page 131 The ON LINE indicator flashes if the operator access door is open 3 Are there any beeps If so see Beeps Page 119 4 Are there any printed messages Operators Guide 109 If so see Messages Printed Page 120 Is the interface cable securely connected and is the printer responding to the host computer If not see Communications Page 129 Is the paper and ribbon installed properly Is the paper path obstructed Did you change paper ribbon configuration settings computers ports print drivers power receptacles or cords printhead gap just before the problem occurred If so double check to be sure the procedure is completed and correct Any problem with switch panel control of the printer for example indicators that do not light switches that do not seem to work If so see Switch Panel Page 127 10 Does there seem to be a problem with computer control of the printer
213. milar to the one shown on Page 41 except that Columns 8 and 9 contain characters rather than control codes Instead of the U S national use character map you can select the multilingual Portuguese or Hebrew character map under Epson IBM 2 Code Page Page 84 Epson Character Map Operators Guide 79 Pressing YES prints out the present Epson national use character map selection e United States factory e Japan default e France e Norway e Germany e Denmark Il e United Kingdom e Spain Il e Denmark e Latin America e Sweden e Hebrew e Italy Epson e Italy ANSI e Spain For more information on Epson national use character maps see Appendix D Epson IBM 1 Code Page Pressing YES prints out the present Epson emulation code page selection for the IBM 1 character set e Code Page 437 U S factory default e Code Page 850 Multilingual e Code Page 860 Portugal For more information on IBM code pages see Appendix D 80 Configuration Epson IBM 2 Code Page Pressing YES prints out the present Epson emulation code page selection for the IBM 2 character set e Code Page 437 U S factory default e Code Page 850 Multilingual e Code Page 860 Portugal e Code Page 437 Hebrew For more information on IBM code pages see Appendix D IBM Character Options Pressing YES prints out the first of the IBM character options listed below e IBM Control Code Map e IBM 1 Code Page e IBM 2 Code P
214. mm A 16 Appendix A Specifications Gluing Gluing specifications for multipart forms are as follows Spot gluing should be applied along both sides Spot gluing should be applied at the alternate positions from the top to bottom sheet Glue should be applied evenly without wrinkling or creasing Paper thickness change due to gluing should not exceed 0 05 mm Crimp Fastening Crimp specifications for multipart forms are as follows Double crimp fasteners 4 tail should be applied to the same positions on both sides of the forms See the figure on the next page Single crimp fasteners 4 tail are also acceptable In consideration of displacement between the top and bottom layers a spacing of at least 3 in should be used for form design Displacement between sheets in 5 part forms should not exceed 2 2 mm in self print testing The combination of gluing on one side and crimp fasteners on the other side is allowed The crimp fastener pitch should be a maximum of 2 in When the total thickness of forms is 0 3 mm or less and the paper width is 10 in or less a pitch of 3 in is allowed Operator s Guide A 17 Metallic fasteners must not be used EN KON N S l O Crimp fasteners Wow 2 inches Double 4 tail max FT fy ux NA i S CN N Kg j Se l di CN A ii HH Sprocket Holes and Perforations Sprocket hole and perforation specifications for multipart forms are as follows
215. mns if ESC D has not been sent If no tabs exist to the right of the current column HT is ignored VT Vertical Tab ASCII VT Control CTRL K Decimal 11 Hexadecimal 0B Causes the printer to print the data stored in the print buffer then tab to the next tab setting set by ESC B or ESC b If no tabs exist past the current position on the page VT performs the same function as linefeed LF If Auto Carriage Return CR on LF is enabled a carriage return is performed after VT Operator s Guide 255 ESC B Set Multiple Vertical Tabs ASCII ESC B n1 n16 NUL Control CTRL B n1 n16 CTRL Decimal 27 66 n1 n16 0 Hexadecimal 1B 42 n1 n16 00 Sets vertical tabs to the specified lines Note that this control command is terminated with a null byte n denotes the line number for each tab The valid entries for n are from 2 to the bottom line on the page as specified by the form length setting Send the values of n in ascending order An out of order tab value is interpreted as a terminator ESC B clears all existing vertical tabs Therefore to add one tab you must include all existing tabs plus the new one Use ESC B to set the tabs Use the Vertical Tab control code VT to cause the printer to tab to each subsequent tab Example REM SET VERTICAL TABS TO LINES 5 AND 10 LPRINT CHR 27 B CHR 5 CHR 10 CHR 0 ESCR Set Tabs to Power On Settings ASCII ESC R Control
216. n Block End of Medium Substitute File Separator Group Separator Record Separator Unit Separator Delete ESC QO Reserved ESCA ESC B ESC F or SSA ESC Gor ESA ESC I or HTJ ESC Q or PU1 ESC R or PU2 ESC S or STS ESC T or CCH ESC U or MW ESC V or SPA ESC W or EPA ESC X ESC Y ESC Z Reserved Reserved Start of Selected Area End of Selected Area Horizontal Tab with Justification Private Use 1 Private Use 2 Set Transmit State Cancel Character Message Waiting Start of Protected Area End of Protected Area Reserved Reserved Reserved Operators Guide 267 CHARACTER PITCH DIFFERENCES Control commands used to set character pitch are the same in the DEC emulations of the 4100 printer and DEC LA210 printers except for commands shown in the table below Character Pitch Control LA210 4100 Printer Sequence Printer ESC 3w 13 2 pitch 15 0 pitch ESC 4w 16 5 pitch 16 67 pitch ESC 7w 6 6 pitch 7 5 pitch ESC 8w 8 25 pitch 8 33 pitch ESC 9w 9 1 pitch ESC 18w 18 2 pitch GRAPHICS DENSITY DIFFERENCES Graphics densities available in the 4100 printer are different than graphics densities available in the DEC LA210 printer The differences are shown in the following tables DEC LA210 Printer Graphics Densities Aspect Dots inch Overlap ratio Dots line Inches Line 330 77 00 4 58 4350 13 18 220 66 00 3 04 2880 13 09 168 55 00 2 29 2160 13 09 132 50 00 1 83 1760 13 18 110 32 00
217. n downloaded mapped or overlayed print from the currently selected character set stored in ROM See the next subsection Printing Downloaded Characters If you select another character set or change emulation mode your downloaded characters are not overwritten Downloaded characters remain in temporary memory RAM until e Cleared with the Factory Reset option on the configuration menu or with control command SOH AzX e Overwritten with other selections e Cleared by setting the Input Buffer Size option to Maximum no user defined characters or by setting the Overlay Characters option to None e Power is turned off Note Download characters may be retained for a variable amount of time after the power is turned off Operators Guide 161 PRINTING DOWNLOADED CHARACTERS Follow this procedure to print downloaded characters 1 Use the configuration menu to set the printer to accept downloaded characters 2 Use the command SOH Az amp to download characters to RAM as described in this section 3 Select the downloaded characters for printing Downloaded characters may be selected when created using SOH Az amp That setting may be changed at any time You can print from downloaded characters stored in RAM or the currently selected character set stored in ROM on a character by character basis by changing the data byte source using SOH Az as discussed earlier in this section You can print from all downloaded
218. n or character set is selected e Power is turned off The format and examples for sending the command follows SOH A z 96 Select Character Source and Library ASCII SOH A z 96 s 1 n1 n2 Decimal 1 65 122 37 s 1 n1 n2 Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 25 s 1 n1 n2 Control CTRLA A Z 96 s 1 n1 n2 Selects a character source and character library for a range of data bytes s specifies the source the type of memory that contains the character library specifies the character library residing in the character source Values for s and are as follows Character Character S e Source Library 0 0 ROM permanent memory Currently selected character set 1 0 RAM temporary memory Download characters 2 0 ROM OCR A overlay characters 2 1 ROM OCR B overlay characters n1 and n2 define the range of data bytes for which the selection applies To map only one data byte enter the same value for both n1 and n2 OCR A and OCR B characters print only when NLQ printing is selected See Appendix D for charts of OCR A and OCR B characters The characters correspond to the characters in the current data byte map If you have mapped characters prior to selecting OCR A and OCR B the overlay characters equivalent to the mapped characters are printed If no equivalent to a mapped character exists within the OCR A or OCR B Operators Guide 151 character library the character for that data byte value is printed from the
219. nary expression correspond to the printhead pins that fire to create dots in each dot column If a bit is set the corresponding pin fires If it is not set the corresponding pin does not fire See the figure on the next page and the example that follows Operators Guide 189 For example if d1 is 19 decimal the corresponding binary expression is 00010011 Pins 8 7 and 4 fire Cell Dot Values Column 128 O 19 00010011 64 O 32 O 16 o 8 v 4 2 o 1 ABO AG1 The printer does not print until it receives sufficient data to fill all dot columns reserved for graphics Therefore if dot column space is reserved beyond the area in which printing occurs it must be filled with nulls decimal Os 190 Epson FX 100 Control Commands The following example shows the code necessary to cause the printer to print the following graphic pattern Printhead MSB O e e O e d o e d O O LSB O ni di d8 LL IT T ABO AH Note n 216 vertical line spacing may be used in graphic printing n 216 in line spacing is approximated using 1 144 in steps Maximum local and cumulative error is 1 216 in Example REM PRINT AN X SHAPED PATTERN USING SINGLE REM DENSITY GRAPHICS LPRINT CHR 27 K CHR 8 CHR 0 FORI 1TO8 READ D LPRINT CHR D NEXT I LPRINT DATA 129 66 36 24 24 36 66 129 Operators Guide 191 ESC L or ESC Y Double Density Graphics ASCII ESC L n1 n2 d1
220. nds USING BASIC TO SEND COMMANDS Using BASIC the control sequence to set the top margin to line 6 in DEC emulation can be sent with the following program ASCII sequence ESC f 6 r Control sequence in decimal 27 91 54 114 BASIC program LPRINT CHR 27 6r To set the left margin to Column 6 and the right margin to Column 76 in IBM Proprinter XL emulation the following program could be used ASCII sequence ESC X L Control sequence in decimal 27 88 6 76 BASIC program LPRINT CHR 27 X CHR 6 CHR 76 USING BATCH FILES TO SEND COMMANDS If you are running DOS on your computer you can create batch files to send the necessary data stream to the printer For example to select 12 pitch single strike printing in Epson emulation the control command is ESC 1 The parentheses around 1 identify this as parameter 1 which in the Epson emulation is decimal or hexadecimal 1 not the ASCII character 1 which would be decimal 49 or hexadecimal 31 In this example we make use of the fact that in Epson and IBM 1 character sets data byte value 155 is also the ESC control code Create a batch file by typing the following at the DOS prompt COPY CON 12PITCH BAT ECHO A gt PRN Z e The first line tells the computer to copy the lines that follow into the file named 12PITCH BAT The BAT extension identifies the file as a batch file Operators Guide 131 e The second line is the command that is performed wheneve
221. nostic test which lights indicators moves the printhead carriage and sounds the beeper For more about this test see Power Up Sequence Test Page 131 The power on off switch is also used in conjunction with switch panel keys to perform various printer operations following the power up sequence test For information about these key combinations see Combination Keys page 10 Operators Guide 7 SWITCH PANEL The switch panel is located at the right front corner of the printer The switch panel contains four indicator lights and four keypad switches sS J BACK J YES J PAPER TUI TOF LINE POWER V NEXT 7 V EXT 7 l JB0 BD PAPER Paper Out Fault Indicator Glows amber when the printer is out of paper Flashes if an overcurrent carriage motor problem paper jam or other fault occurs See Paper Problems in the troubleshooting chart Page 124 Except when in configuration menu mode 8 Basics NLQ POVVER ON LINE EXIT Near Letter Quality Glows green to indicate near letter quality printing is selected To quickly switch between draft quality and NLQ press and hold ON LINE and then momentarily press NLQ Power On Indicator Glows green to indicate the printer is receiving AC power On Line Exit Key and Indicator Press once to place printer on line The indicator glows green Press again to place printer off line Each time
222. number of dot columns that can be reserved The maximum number of d bytes depends on the density specified as follows Maximum No of d bytes Dots In where x of dx 60 816 120 1632 240 3264 75 1020 50 680 Refer to the explanation of the Single Density Graphics command ESC K for information about n1 and n2 and specifics on how to use graphics Example REM PRINT AN X SHAPED PATTERN USING SINGLE REM DENSITY GRAPHICS LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 0 CHR 8 CHR 0 FORI21TO8 READ D Operators Guide 195 LPRINT CHR D NEXT I DATA 129 66 36 24 24 36 66 129 LINE SPACING ESC 1 7 72 inch ASCII ESC 1 Control cTRL 1 Decimal 27 49 Hexadecimal 1B 31 Sets all subsequent line spacing at 7 72 in 10 3 lines per in ESC 1 8 inch ASCII ESC Control cTRL Decimal 27 48 Hexadecimal 1B 30 Sets all subsequent line spacing at 1 8 in 8 lines per in ESC 2 1 6 inch ASCII ESC 2 Control CTRL 2 Decimal 27 50 Hexadecimal 1B 32 Sets all subsequent line spacing at 1 6 in 6 lines per in ESCA n 72 inch ASCII ESC A Control cTRL A Decimal 27 65 Hexadecimal 1B 41 Sets all subsequent line spacing at n 72 in The valid entries for n are 1 to 85 196 X Epson FX 100 Control Commands ESC 3 or ESC J n 216 inch ASCII ESC 3 n Control CTRL 3 n Decimal 27 51 n Hexadecimal 1B 33 n ASCII ESC J n
223. o returned to the left margin 6 Changing line spacing also changes the physical position of tab stops These commands only set or clear the tabs The vertical tab control code VT causes the active line to advance to subsequent tab positions Appendix A opecifications The printer employs three printheads Each printhead contains one row of nine wires arranged vertically The printheads are fastened to a shuttle or carriage assembly Two carriage assemblies are offered e Wide Carriage In 10 pitch draft mode at 6 Ipi the wide carriage is optimized to support a throughput of 300 Ipm over 132 columns in NLQ mode it supports a throughput of 75 Ipm e Narrow Carriage In 10 pitch draft mode at 6 Ipi the narrow carriage is optimized to support a throughput of 400 Ipm over 80 columns in NLQ mode it supports a throughput of 100 Ipm Both models can print a 13 6 in line of characters or graphics This appendix deals with specifications These include the printer s characteristics safety features reliability physical features and requirements Note All specifications in this appendix are subject to change without notice A 2 Appendix A Specifications CHARACTERISTICS Throughput Wide Model Narrow Model Pitch Draft 10 300 Ipm 12 191 Ipm 15 185 lpm 16 67 118 Ipm 18 2 118 Ipm Printing 6 lines per in on a 132 character column Printing 6 lines per in on an 80 character column Printing
224. of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Shielded cables and I O cords must be used for this equipment to comply with the relevant FCC regulations Changes or modifications not expressly approved in writing by Output Technology Corporation may void the user s authority to operate this equipment viii Contents EPA ENERGY STAR PRINTERS PARTNER The 4100 printer complies with voluntary standards for low power consumption as set forth by the U S Environmental Protection Agency DOC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT This digital apparatus does not exc
225. ogical connection between devices where data are transmitted one bit at a time STOP BITS The number of bits that define the end of or space between each serial interface byte SUBSCRIPT Used to print characters slightly lower on a line than the baseline text around them This option is set using the configuration menu or with a control command Subscript characters are sometimes referred to as descenders SUPERSCRIPT Used to print characters slightly higher on a line than the baseline text around them This option is set using the configuration menu or with a control command Superscript characters are sometimes referred to as ascenders WAIST LINE The imaginary horizontal line that is the height of the top of a lower case x that divides tall and upper case characters For example h d A and the like have ascender attributes because part of these characters rise above the waist line whereas a c p and the like do not X ON X OFF A software handshaking protocol in which a receiving device controls data flow using the content of data itself X OFF and X ON are control characters which signal the sending device to stop or resume data transmission Index Active character set printing 37 Alignment image 94 ASCII D 2 character set D 2 Auto Carriage Return 79 Barcodes E 1 alternate commands E 23 data E 10 E 12 density 91 end command E 20 examples E 21 format command E 4 formulas
226. ol Commands ESC6 Select IBM Character Set 2 or Expand Printable Characters ASCII ESC 6 Control CTRL 6 Decimal 27 54 Hexadecimal 1B 36 If the printer is currently set with an IBM character set this command causes it to print IBM Character Set 2 If the printer is currently set with an Epson Character Set this command expands the printable characters to include data byte values 128 to 159 decimal See Appendix D for charts of character sets ESC 7 Select IBM Character Set 1 or Standard Printable Characters ASCII ESC 7 Control CTRL 7 Decimal 27 55 Hexadecimal 1B 37 If the printer is currently set with an IBM character set this command causes it to print IBM Character Set 1 If the printer is currently set with an Epson Character Set this command causes data byte values 128 to 159 decimal to become nonprintable characters cancels ESC 6 See Appendix D for charts of character sets Operators Guide 185 ESC Control Codes Printable Characters ASCII ESC I n Control cTRL n Decimal 27 73 n Hexadecimal 1B 49 n Specifies whether the undefined data bytes from 0 to 31 decimal 00 to 1F hexadecimal and 128 to 159 decimal 80 to 9F hexadecimal are control codes or printable characters ESC does not affect the defined control codes such as BEL BS HT etc See the chart in Appendix D n indicates whether the data byte values are control codes or printabl
227. ol code If the data byte does not have a control function the column contains the abbreviation NUL Appendix D contains a list of standard control code abbreviations 58 Configuration Source This is the memory source of the character or control code The two possibilities are ROM and RAM e ROM stands for read only memory which is permanent memory e RAM stands for random access memory which is temporary memory Character and control codes residing in RAM are lost when the printer is turn off See Character Library which follows Character Library Always Character Library 0 if the source is RAM For ROM there are two possibilities Character Libraries 0 and 1 The source character library combinations are listed below Source Character Library Type of Character ROM 0 Any built in character except an OCR B Character ROM 1 OCR B Character RAM 0 Downloaded Character Character Number Each character within a character library is assigned a number Appendix D contains more detail on this Character The actual printable character presently assigned from a character library The character is printed for that data byte if the printer action is set to CHAR Operators Guide 59 DATA ACTN CTRL SRC LIB CHAR CH BYTE CODE NUM 096 CHAR NUL ROM 76 097 CHAR NUL KOM ao 98 CHAR NUL ROM 698 099 CHAR NUL KOM 099 100 CHAR NUL ROM 149 1 1 CHAR NUL ROM 161 102 CHAR NUL KOM i02 103 CHAR NUL ROM i43
228. ons depends on the use of shielded cables It is the user who is responsible for procuring the appropriate cables Output Technology Corporation 2310 North Fancher Road Spokane WA 99212 1381 This product meets the requirements of the European Communities EMC Directive X Contents Contents Installation See the Kwik Installation and Startup Basics Basic Physical PealilGs cies cade cues dieux ue Ec exes hh 1 Basic Startup and Printing oes ouo un us rne ue er ES 4 A Check Paper Supply etr TI pin EE rr 4 B Close Operator Access Door 1 4 C Turn On Printer 25520 sn nc id ROLE SEU adr cn 4 D Check Top of Form Setting ssssssss 4 E Check Print OUI cec iab b biduo un 5 F Remove Printout 2 oui erede repr bd to dote hc 5 Basic Controls and Indicators aa hoaaaaaaaaaaa nana nanen eee eee eee vene 6 Power On Off Switch agoni nisni 6 I US UE BEER Ins 6 Combination Keys trend orn cites edet ge nea etui eese 10 Basic Connections coe so deci ub di d n tradi cov ua n ati ne dt n Ede UR 15 Power Heceptacle nier IE ERE REO de 15 Interface CONNECTIONS 3 5 ro rat nisa hashash shpesh 16 BASIC BEEPS gji fshihen Mon dh dti dde 17 Operators Guide xi Operations Common Operations cc retro terr pter ja os peer bn po ac tee pe t 21 EoadingP aper sioe totes o e o ee eunte tdeo enses 21 Adjusting the Printhead Gap aauaaaa nana neneve ee
229. ontrol CTRL n S Decimal 27 91 59 n 115 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3B n 73 ASCII ESC 2 n S Control CTRL 7 n S Decimal 27 91 48 59 n 115 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 30 3B n 73 Sets the right margin to Column n 2 Selecting or cancelling font pitches changing the print quality to draft or NLQ or changing the print area modifies horizontal margin settings If the active column is greater than the new right margin the next printable character activates the autowrap feature 280 DEC LA210 Control Commands The value of n for the right margin depends on the setting of the left margin and the selected pitch where LM is the setting for the left margin 5 0 pitch 6 0 pitch 7 5 pitch 8 33 pitch 9 1 pitch LM 1 xn 66 LM 1 xn x 79 LM 1 lt n lt 99 LM 1 lt n lt 109 LM 1 lt n lt 120 If n is greater than the upper limit the maximum permitted value is assumed ESC n1 n2 s Left and Right Margin ASCII ESC Control Decimal 27 Hexadecimal 1B cTRL n1 n1 91 n1 59 5B n1 3B S S 115 73 Sets the left margin to Column n1 and the right margin to Column n2 The value of n2 for the right margin depends on the setting of the left margin and the selected pitch 5 0 pitch 6 0 pitch 7 5 pitch 8 33 pitch 9 1 pitch 10 0 pitch 12 0 pitch 15 0 pitch ni t1 sn2 sz 66 nit1sn2s79 nit1sn2s99 ni 1 sn2 lt 109 ni t1 sn2 sz 120 ni 1
230. orarily apply the overlay is ESC n1 n2 The two digit decimal number n1n2 specifies the number of characters to be printed from the all character character set After the specified characters the printer reverts to the active IBM character set Note The all character character set is available only in the IBM emulation ESC n1 n2 is ignored in the IBM mode of the Epson emulation D 40 Appendix D Character Sets IBM 2 MULTILINGUAL CHARACTER SET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 WXESNWESXN Operator s Guide D 41 160 176 192 208 ALERTE 12 145 161 177 193 209 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247 FATE HESPAE 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251 140 156 172 188 204 22 KANE TESH 141 157 173 189 205 221 142 158 143 159 D 42 Appendix D Character Sets EROON EN I Mi rs NATU MEE OVERLAY it Si Em or nc DE Ep m s aaa Le Soe doa Sss HEEE mc Ec mc g EE i bem 2 NSKIN NM EE Eom NH EN A E s mp Operator s Guide D 43 EERS umm mm cc gt EE O EE ES O O gt J oa oe mu ES p EE 7J ME emper N ER S o LL p o p p B _ gt p E lll D 44 Appendix D Characte
231. ory default The robust setting only applies to the X ON X OFF protocol Off The printer transmits X ON only once when it is ready to receive data On The printer transmits X ON to the computer every 20 seconds if it is ready and waiting for data from the computer X OFF When Off Line Pressing YES prints out the present setting e Off e On factory default The X OFF when Off Line setting only applies to the X ON X OFF protocol Off If the printer has transmitted X ON to the computer prior to being switched off line the printer remains in the X ON state until it receives Operators Guide 63 data from the computer Although the printer will not print data the computer can send data to the printer On The printer transmits X OFF to the computer when it goes off line The printer will not accept or print data Baud Pressing YES prints out the present baud setting e 19200 e 9600 factory default e 4800 e 2400 e 1200 Baud is the speed at which serial information flows between the computer and printer In general the higher the baud value the faster this interface speed Print speed however is maximized at a serial interface speed of 9600 baud the factory default Data Bits Pressing YES prints out the present setting e 8 Bits factory default e 7 Bits This defines the number of data bits in each byte transmitted between computer and printer 8 Bits Commonly an eight bit byte is necessar
232. pain Hebrew Finland Canada French Multilingual France Germany U K Denmark Sweden Italy ANSI Spain Hebrew Finland Canada French Multilingual VT100 Line Draw U S Overlay Characters OCR A OCR B Accept User Defined Characters None BARCODE OPTIONS Barcode Strike Single Strike Double Strike Barcode Density 100 dpi 75 dpi SYSTEM OPTIONS Factory Reset Lock Char Set amp Emulation On Off Initialize Sensitivity High Low Vertical Alignment Factory defaults are underlined Page references are on the extreme right See footnotes on following page 54 Configuration 1 O0 5 in increments including A4 length of 11 2 3 in 2 EMULATION does not appear as a configuration menu option if Lock Character Set and Emulation is On 3 CHARACTER OPTIONS does not appear as a configuration menu option if Lock Character Set and Emulation is On Only applies if the Epson Character Set is Epson in the FX 100 emulation Only applies if the Epson Character Set is IBM 1 in the FX 100 emulation Only applies if the Epson Character Set is IBM 2 in the FX 100 emulation Only applies if the IBM Character Set is IBM 1 in the Proprinter emulation GO is the default for 7 Bit DEC GO and G2 are the defaults for 8 Bit DEC You can assign 5 6 7 8 Only applies if the IBM Character Set is IBM 2 in the Proprinter emulation 9 different graphic map defaults for 7 Bit and 8 Bit DEC
233. parallel interface C 2 serial interface 65 B 15 Hex dump 132 power up hot key 10 Hex to decimal conversion 45 IBM character options 85 Image alignment 110 Indexes control codes and commands universal 150 DEC 272 IBM 236 Epson 190 Indicators 6 Initialize sensitivity 93 Input buffer size 70 Input sensitivity 93 Interface connectors 16 menu selection 63 parallel interface C 1 serial B 1 serial options 64 Italics 74 Labels feeding 23 requirements A 19 LF on CR 78 Line feed auto linefeed 79 control key 9 Lines Inch 77 Loading paper 21 Lock character set and emulation 92 Lubrication 98 Maintenance 95 changing forms compressor 104 changing fuses 107 changing ribbon 99 cleaning 97 lubrication 98 static electricity 96 vertical image alignment 110 Menu configuration 51 map of 56 Messages printed 120 Microline down 13 Microline up 13 Move paper 9 10 13 National use character maps DEC D 34 D 41 Epson D 18 D 40 IBM D 23 D 25 D 31 Near letter quality NLQ 32 indicator 8 menu 72 73 on line hot key 14 NONVOLATILE RAM CHECKSUM 121 On line control key 8 indicator 8 On line hot keys 12 Paper box trim 126 feeding 23 installing 21 moving 9 10 13 specifications 23 A 14 Paper gap adjusting 27 Paper jam detect 80 Paper out indicator 7 124 Paper slew rate 80 Paper speed 80 Parallel interface C 1 basics
234. per Data Bytes default ASCII ESC Control CTRL Decimal 27 125 Hexadecimal 1B 7D Maps the G2 character map selected with control command ESC into the upper data bytes making that character map active for printing To print only one character from the character map selected as G2 use ESC N 216 DEC LA210 Control Commands ESC Map G3 into Upper Data Bytes ASCII ESC Control cTRLI Decimal 27 124 Hexadecimal 1B 7C Maps the G3 character map selected with control command ESC into the upper data bytes making that character map active for printing See ESC n for an example To print only one character from the character map selected as G3 use ESC O ESC N or SS2 Print Next Character from G2 ASCII ESC N n Control cTRL N n Decimal 27 78 n Hexadecimal 1B 4E n ASCII SS2 n Control not applicable Decimal 142 n Hexadecimal 8E n Prints the next character from the G2 character map selected with control command ESC n specifies the character to print The value of n must be from 0 to 127 G2 does not need to be currently active that is mapped into the lower or upper data bytes to use this command Both commands perform the same function SS2 is valid only if 8 Bit DEC has been set in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7 This command is valid for printing one character only To print continuo
235. perforation to be even with the TOF arrow gt If top of form must be reset see Setting Top of Form Page 30 Operators Guide 5 E Check Print Quality Make sure the ON LINE indicator is lit Page 8 and the operator access door is closed and then send a file from the host computer to the printer e If the print is too light or too dark smudged or if some dots are not being printed adjust the printhead gap See Adjusting the Printhead Gap Page 27 If necessary replace an old ribbon cartridge with a new one Page 99 e f desired switch between near letter quality NLQ and draft quality by pressing and holding ON LINE and then momentarily pressing NLQ Although NLQ has more dots and therefore looks better than draft quality print draft is faster F Remove Printout 1 Press ON LINE to place printer off line 2 Use FORM FEED to move paper to a convenient tear off point 3 Separate printout from paper supply at perforation 4 Press ON LINE again to place printer on line 6 Basics BASIC CONTROLS AND INDICATORS POWER ON OFF SWITCH This power on off switch is located at the left rear corner of the printer Press the I side of this switch to turn on the printer Make sure the O side the off side is depressed when e Connecting or disconnecting cables e Performing operations close to the ES printhead carriage JBO AU VVhen you turn on the printer it automatically performs a brief diag
236. pping Characters Select Character Source Library SOH Az s 1 n1 n2 Map Characters SOH Az B n1 n2 c1a c1p cxa cxp 152 153 154 154 155 157 157 157 162 163 Operators Guide 139 Download Characters Download Characters SOH Az amp m nt1 n2 a1a a1p ct cx 174 Graphics Universal Graphics SOH Az d1 d2 r c1 c2 g1 gx 184 ALPHABETICAL SUMMARY OF UNIVERSAL CONTROL COMMANDS Command Function Page SOHAz Set Pitch and Strike 155 SOH A z 96 Select Character Source Library 162 SOHAz amp Download Characters 174 SOH A z Universal Graphics 184 SOHAzA Select Emulation and Reset Printer 153 SOHAzB Map Characters 163 SOHAzC Length of Form in Millimeters 152 SOHAzL Enable Disable Barcode Printing 157 SOHAzM Set Barcode Parameters 157 SOHAzT Select Print Quality 157 SOHAzX Reset to Power Up Settings 154 SOHAzY Set n 144 Inch Line Spacing 154 140 Universal Control Commands FORM LENGTH SOHAzC Length of Form in Millimeters ASCII SOH A z C n Control CTRLA A Z C n Decimal 1 65 122 67 n Hexadecimal 01 41 7A 43 n Sets the form length to a specified number of millimeters n indicates form length as follows e n 0O0 Form length set to 148 5 mm e n 1 Form length set to 210 0 mm e n 2 Form length set to 297 0 mm e n 3 Form length set to 420 0 mm If the bottom margin was previously set by the Epson or IBM Skip Over Perforation command ESC N the comman
237. printer IO FF JE U BACK or with the printer already on press and hold ON LINE and then simultaneously press FORM FEED and LINE FEED CINE J E EXIT T BACK T YES The printer prints out 36 Operations HELP OPTIONS 2 Respond by pressing YES The printer prints out Status Print 2 3 Press NEXT The printer prints out Menu Tree 2 4 Again press NEXT e e 5 Continue pressing NEXT e e e until the printer prints Print Active Character Set 6 Then press YES The printer moves to the top of the next form and then prints the active character set The illustrations on the following pages show the draft mode factory default character sets for the Epson FX 100 IBM Proprinter XL and DEC LA210 emulations Examples are shown smaller than actual size In these printouts the first hexadecimal digit of the character or control code is written along the top of the table and the second hexadecimal digit is written along the side Thus the hexadecimal control code for a capital Operators Guide 37 Z in all three character sets is 5A which is equivalent to decimal 90 using the hexadecimal to decimal conversion chart on Page 43 Active Character Set 9 NUL SOH NUL NUL NUL NUL NUL BEL BS HT 1 NUL DCL bee DCS pc4 NUL NUL NUL CAN NULL NUL ESC NUL NUL NUL MUI 3 4 5 6 7 8 PF p M
238. r Quality VVhile ON TJ pressing ON LINE LINE T TOF momentarily press NLQ to EXIT NEXT switch between near letter quality and draft quality printing modes BASIC CONNECTIONS POWER RECEPTACLE Operators Guide 15 The power receptacle is located at the left rear corner of the printer below the power on off switch flc ce i a Ly 7 72 A CY A DAO H One end of the power cord plugs into the lower portion of the receptacle The other end of the power cord plugs into a standard three prong grounded electrical outlet Plug power cord only into the type of power source specified in the window near the top of the receptacle The window shows either 120 Vac 100 Vac 220 Vac or 240 Vac The compartment above the power cord contains a voltage selection tumbler and two fuses If necessary to change the voltage selection or the fuses refer to Changing Fuses Page 107 16 Basics INTERFACE CONNECTORS Serial Serial and parallel interface connectors are Parallel located near the right rear corner of the printer Use one of these connectors to interconnect the printer and host computer Always turn the printer off when disconnecting or connecting a cable connector always use a shielded cable and always lock the cable connector to the printer connector as specified in the following paragraphs OOOOOOOOOOOO0O O OOOOOOOOOOOO al JBO AA1 Parallel Int
239. r Sets EPSON ESC 6 PRINTABLE CHARACTER Ri ER i S S m ES B p pp Epp Ep pp m EET mu Epp Epp Epp Epp Epp Operator s Guide D 45 i ie 5 cc J EEES c e cc ee cc REES O I FESE cc EIES O gt J EIES O FEES cc ST mp ESES O EERS O J ESES cc lel do i xi D 46 Appendix D Character Sets EPSON STANDARD CODE PAGE CHARACTER SET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 75 91 107 123 12 28 44 60 76 92 108 124 13 29 45 61 77 93 109 125 14 30 46 62 78 94 110 126 15 31 47 63 79 95 111 127 Based on U S Nartional Use Character Map with an 8 bit data interface Operator s Guide D 47 129 145 161 177 1 130 146 162 178 194 131 147 163 179 195 132 148 164 180 196 133 149 165 181 197 2 245 134 150 166 182 198 21 230 246 135 151 167 183 199 21 231 247 136 152 168 184 200 21 232 248 Ka Giulia e q 137 153 169 185 201 21 233 249 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 253 142 158 174 190 222 238 254 X 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255 D 48 Appendix D Character Sets IBM ALL CHARACTER OVERLAY med S E s Ecc JERES O _ Ea 16 H EN Bb H NN JERES O _ _ 4 Bul 3 4 EE s az uc rs Ec ela El s s Ecc 25 Ec slal d i m n mo 00 amp Operator s Guide D 49 pu NENNEN PO PO p p
240. r the IBM 2 character set e Code Page 437 U S factory default e Code Page 850 Multilingual e Code Page 860 Portugal e Code Page 437 Hebrew For more information on IBM code pages see Appendix D Operators Guide 83 DEC Character Options Pressing YES prints out the first of the DEC character options listed below e DEC Character Set e Character Map GO e Character Map G1 e Character Map G2 e Character Map G3 A DEC LA210 printer contains two variations of DEC character sets one called the 7 Bit DEC and the other the 8 Bit DEC Although only one character set can be the DEC default character set you can assign national use character map s to each of them You specify national use character maps in GO through G3 DEC refers to GO through G3 as graphics maps When the printer is turned on GO is automatically assigned to either e The 7 Bit DEC Character Set e The lower half of the 8 Bit DEC Character Set G2 is automatically assigned to the upper half of the 8 Bit DEC Character Set You can specify one of 12 default national use character maps or a multilingual character map for each graphics map Although these power on defaults cannot be changed GO G1 G2 G3 can be re assigned after turning on the printer by using DEC control commands GO can only be assigned to data bytes 0 127 84 Configuration DEC Character Set Pressing YES prints out the present DEC character set configuration
241. r you use this batch file Enter C by pressing the ALT key and entering 155 from the numeric keypad on the right side of the keyboard Data byte value 155 is also an ESC control code in Epson and IBM 1 character sets e Enter by typing 1 Enter A by pressing the ALT key and entering 1 from the numeric keypad Data byte value 01 decimal is represented by an A on the screen or occasionally by the smiley face e The third line closes the file saving it as named in Line 1 Enter Z by pressing the CTRL key and entering Z from the keyboard or by pressing function key F6 Once the batch file is created type the name of the file when you want to send the control command to select 12 pitch to the printer Type the following at the DOS prompt 12PITCH The same command can be sent using the following BASIC program ASCII sequence ESC smiley face BASIC program LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 1 or BASIC program LPRINT CHR amp H1B CHR amp H21 CHR amp HO1 where the prefix amp H is used to denote hexadecimal numbers 132 Universal Control Commands SENDING COMMANDS FROM THE DOS COMMAND LINE Commands can also be issued directly from the DOS command line by typing the following ECHO command data PRN The command to select 12 pitch single strike printing in Epson emulation could be sent from the DOS command line as follows ASCII sequence ESC smiley face Command line ECHO A gt PRN USING CONTROL KE
242. ries and settings for Emulation and Character Options do not appear as you navigate through the configuration menu However the emulation and 88 Configuration character set settings and options are printed out when you select Status Print Page 56 or Print All Options Page 58 Initialize Sensitivity Pressing YES prints out the active setting e Low factory default e High The initialize sensitivity setting applies only to the INIT signal Pin 31 on the parallel interface Low Low sensitivity means that the printer requires an active low INIT pulse of at least 100 ms in order to reset the printer to its power up default settings In most situations prefer low sensitivity especially when using overly long parallel interface cables over 10 ft or when dealing with an electronically noisy computer printer connection High High sensitivity means that the printer requires an active low INIT pulse of at least 1 66 us in order to reset the printer to its power up default settings Use high sensitivity when the INIT pulse is short such as with an IBM 3197 terminal Vertical Alignment Pressing YES allows you to adjust the printer s right versus left pass timing for firing printhead pins See Vertical Image Alignment Page 110 for the procedure Maintenance WARNINGS Turn off printer and unplug power cord before attempting any maintenance procedure Hazardous voltages are present in th
243. rol CTRL 2 9 I Decimal 27 91 63 50 57 108 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3F 32 39 6C Cancels font pitches set with control sequence ESC 2 9 h Sets pitch select mode to all pitches The pitch in use prior to selecting font pitches is restored ESC zorESC 1 z Draft Quality Printing ASCII ESC Z Control CTRL z Decimal 27 91 48 34 122 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 30 22 7A ASCII ESC 1 z Control CTRL 1 Zz Decimal 27 91 49 34 122 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 31 22 7A Selects draft quality printing Cancels near letter quality printing selected from the configuration menu or with control command ESC 2 z Both control commands perform the same function ESC 2 z Near Letter Quality Printing ASCI ESC 2 z Control cTAL 2 z Decimal 27 91 50 34 122 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 32 22 7A Selects near letter quality printing This print mode remains in effect until the printer is turned off or until reset with command ESC z or ESC 1 z or changed using the configuration menu or the NLQ control key Near letter quality printing is available only in 10 12 and 15 pitch Operators Guide 301 ESC 4m Enable Underline ASCII ESC 4 m Control crR I 4 m Decimal 27 91 52 109 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 34 6D Selects the underline function All succeeding print characters are underlined until the function is disabled with control command ESC 24 m or ESC 0 m ESC 2
244. rol code HT causes the printer to tab to each subsequent tab n denotes the character position of each tab The valid range for n is from 1 to one less than the right margin minus the left margin Send the values of n in ascending order An out of order tab value is interpreted as a terminator The tabs are set relative to the left margin An n value of 1 sets the tab one character to the right of the left margin A maximum value of n sets the tab one character to the left of the right margin Therefore n is the character position relative to the left margin not the actual column number Operators Guide 217 The following shows the location of tabs for various values of n Column 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Margins L R n 1 T n 4 T n 6 T Example REM SET HORIZONTAL TABS TO COLS 6 12 amp 30 LPRINT CHR 27 D CHR 6 CHR 12 LPRINT CHR 30 CHR 0 HT Horizontal Tab ASCII HT Control CTRL Decimal 9 Hexadecimal 09 Causes the printer to tab to the next tab setting set by control command ESC D or to the default tab every 8 columns if ESC D has not been sent If no tabs exist to the right of the current column HT is ignored VT Vertical Tab ASCII VT Control CTRL K Decimal 11 Hexadecimal 0B Causes the printer to print the data stored in the print buffer then tab to the next tab setting set by ESC B or ESC b If no tabs exist past the current position on the page VT performs the same
245. roprinter Control Commands SO or ESC SO Enlarged Pitch ASCII SO Control CTRL N Decimal 14 Hexadecimal OE ASCII ESC SO Control CTRL CTRLN Decimal 27 14 Hexadecimal 1B OE Enlarges the currently selected pitch as follows Current Pitch After SO or ESC SO 18 2 9 1 17 14 8 57 16 67 8 33 15 0 7 5 12 0 6 0 10 0 5 0 See the BASIC example under DCA SO causes the enlarged pitch to remain in effect for one line only or until one of the following is received e CR VT SOHAz n e CAN ESCW 0 ESCAz n e LF ESC W 48 e FF DC4 Note Enlarged pitch is called Double Wide Printing by some manufacturers This command is not valid when NLQ printing is selected Operator s Guide 247 DC4 Cancel Enlarged Pitch ASCII DC4 Control CTRL T Decimal 20 Hexadecimal 14 Cancels enlarged pitch set with command SO or ESC SO See the table below Pitch Set with SO or After DC4 ESC SO 9 1 18 2 8 57 17 14 8 33 16 67 7 5 15 0 6 0 12 0 5 0 10 0 This command does not cancel enlarged pitches set with ESC W n ESC n SOH Az n or ESC Az n Example REM SET 12 PITCH REM THEN CHANGE TO 10 PITCH REM AFTER THAT ENLARGE TO 5 PITCH REM FINALLY CANCEL ENLARGED PITCH REM TO RETURN TO 10 PITCH AS FOLLOWS LPRINT CHR 27 CHR 58 LPRINT Now printing in 12 cpi LPRINT CHR 18 LPRINT Now printing in 10 cpi LPRINT CHR 14 LPRINT Now printing in 5 cpi LPR
246. rrectly with character substitutions and other problems If you must change configuration settings and if those changes include interface and emulation changes we advise that you change the interface and or emulation settings first before changing other settings Also consider the following guidelines e Interface Option changes Page 63 e f you select Serial do not forget to check the Serial Options settings Page 64 for protocol baud number of data bits parity and the number of stop bits These must agree with like settings on the computer e Emulation changes Page 80 e The selected emulation also affects the Character Options Page 81 52 Configuration CONFIGURATION MAP CONFIGURATION MAP HELP Status Print Non Default List Hot Key List Print Active Character Set Menu Tree Print All Options Diagnostic Codes Print Data Byte Map INTERFACE OPTIONS Active Interface Serial Parallel Serial Options only apply if active interface is serial Protocol DTR X ON X OFF ETX ACK DTR X ON X OFF DTR Polarity Low High Robust X ON Off On X OFF when Off Line Off On Baud 4800 2400 1200 19200 9600 Data Bits 7 Bits 8 Bits Parity Even Odd Mark Space None Stop Bits 2 Bits 1 Bit Input Buffer Size Min user defined characters OK Max no user defined characters PRINT STYLE Near Letter Quality On Off Bi Directional Graphics NLQ On Off Bold Print On Off Italics On
247. rs can be bolded and or italicized Bi Directional Graphics NLQ Pressing YES prints out the active NLQ status e Off factory default e On Normally all draft text is printed bi directionally that is on right to left as well as left to right passes of the printhead carriage This option lets you enable or disable bi directional printing of all non draft text and graphics Non draft text and graphics include graphical images barcodes except PostNet printed as text and NLQ text Consider enabling bi directional printing if you normally print NLQ text and or routinely include graphics Bi directional printing approximately doubles throughput thereby increasing efficiency Enabling bi directional printing overrides all uni directional printing control commands sent by the host Consider disabling bi directional printing if barcode readability is a problem Also setting the Barcode Density in the configuration menu from 75 dpi to 100 dpi may enhance readability Operators Guide 69 Bold Print Pressing YES prints out the active interface setting e Off factory default e On Off The printer prints standard normal weight characters On The printer prints bolded characters Bold or emphasized characters appear fatter than normal weight characters Since bolding is usually reserved for emphasis rather than paragraph text bolding does not appreciably slow down the print speed Bold characters can also be ital
248. s The table below assumes 12 0 or 6 0 set prior to beginning graphics Dots Aspect Dots Inches n inch Overlap ratio line line 2 240 64 29 3 36 3168 13 2 3 240 64 29 3 36 3168 13 2 4 180 52 38 2 08 2376 13 2 5 0 or 1 180 40 48 1 67 2376 13 2 6 120 28 57 1 39 1584 13 2 7 120 28 57 1 39 1584 13 2 8 90 04 76 1 04 1188 13 2 9 90 04 76 1 04 1188 13 2 Note Graphics densities available in the 4100 printer are different than graphics densities on the DEC LA210 printer The differences are mentioned in Graphics Density Differences earlier in this section d1 through dx are data byte values from 63 decimal to 126 decimal 3F hexadecimal to 7E hexadecimal each representing a graphics dot column Subtract 63 decimal from each byte and convert the result to an 8 bit binary expression The bits set to logic 1 in the binary expression correspond to the printhead pins that fire to create dots in each dot column If a bit is set the corresponding pin fires If it is not set the corresponding pin does not fire In each line 6 printhead pins may fire during graphics The least significant bit in the binary expression corresponds to the top pin See the following examples Operators Guide 293 The dot pattern for data byte value 82 is shown below 82 63 19 00010011 Dot Rows Dot Column a A C N 6 2 p 2 5i OOOOOO 2 252 Cell Values 19 20001001 1 2 4 8 16 32 If a dot pattern below
249. s Guide 115 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONTINUED Print Positioning continued Blank Lines Between Printer and Host Both In configuration menu change Every Line of Print Supplying Line Feeds LF on CR from On to Off Prints Across Horizontal 1 Wrong Configuration 1 In configuration menu change Perforation Setting Skip Perf from Off to On 2 Host Changing Forms Check print driver settings of Settings host software If necessary use hex dump mode Page 132 to check control codes sent by host Prints Across Left Paper Too Far to the Right The left tractor should be Vertical Perforation positioned at the far left stop Prints Across Right Form column and margin widths Vertical Perforation are controlled by the host software Unformatted text prints a full carriage width line Paper Problems Positioning Feeding Paper Out Jamming PAPER Lit 1 Left Tractor Too Far to Move the left tractor to the far With Paper Installed Right left so that paper covers the paper out sensor 2 Paper Out Sensor Lever Call for service Needs Adjusting 3 Bad Paper Out Sensor Call for service or Electronics Failure Avoid printing directly on the platen 116 Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONTINUED Paper Problems Positioning Feeding Paper Out Jamming continued Paper Does not Feed Host Not Sending Line In configuration mode under Set When Printing Feeds with Carriage Forms Options set L
250. s Guide 273 ESC n Select G1 ASCII ESC n Control CTRLI n Decimal 27 41 n Hexadecimal 1B 29 n Assigns a character map to G1 n specifies one of the character maps listed previously This control command does not change the character set currently in use The selection takes effect when G1 is mapped into the lower or upper data bytes using control command SO or ESC respectively ESC n Select G2 ASCII ESC n Control CTRL n Decimal 27 42 n Hexadecimal 1B 2A n Assigns a character map to G2 n specifies one of the character maps listed previously This control command does not change the character set currently in use The selection takes effect when G2 is mapped into the lower or upper data bytes using control command ESC n or ESC respectively ESC n Select G3 ASCII ESC n Control CTRL n Decimal 27 43 n Hexadecimal 1B 2B n Assigns a character map to G3 n specifies one of the character maps listed previously This control command does not change the character set currently in use The selection takes effect when G3 is mapped into the lower or upper data bytes using control command ESC o or ESC respectively 214 DEC LA210 Control Commands The follovving example selects the U K character map for G3 and then maps G3 into the upper data bytes Example LPRINT CHR 27 A LPRINT CHR 27 SI Map GO in
251. s are 161 through 254 decimal A1 through FE hexadecimal The positions of the lower and upper data bytes are shown in the illustration on the next page The four pre selectable character maps are called GO G1 G2 and G3 GO through G3 are equivalent to the character maps that Digital Equipment Corporation refers to as Graphics 0 through Graphics 3 The lower and upper data bytes are equivalent to the character maps Digital Equipment Corporation refers to as GL Graphics Left and GR Graphics Right Any character map available in DEC LA210 emulation may be selected as GO G1 G2 or G3 These selections are stored in permanent memory and are not lost at power off Default selections are shown below e GO United States Character Map e Gt VT100 Line Draw Character Map e G2 Multilingual Character Map e G3 United States Character Map 210 DEC LA210 Control Commands Techniques for mapping preselected character maps into lovver or upper data bytes are shown in the following illustration Default mappings are shown below Lower Data Bytes GO e Upper Data Bytes G2 All available character maps are primary character maps and the printer supports the DEC LA210 control commands used to select primary character maps No alternate character maps are available and control codes to select alternate character maps are not supported The illustration that follows shows how character maps GO through G3 are selected as nat
252. s it receives Adjacent columns are paired and if corresponding bits in either dot column are set a pin is fired to create a dot The arguments for quad density graphics are the same as the Single Density Graphics command ESC K Example REM PRINT 2 SOLID BARS 150 DOT PATTERNS IN REM LENGTH USING QUAD DENSITY GRAPHICS FORI 1TO2 LPRINT CHR 27 Z CHR 150 CHR 0 FOR J 1 TO 150 LPRINT CHR 255 NEXT J LPRINT NEXT I END Operators Guide 235 LINE SPACING ESC 1 7172 inch ASCII ESC 1 Control cTRL 1 Decimal 27 49 Hexadecimal 1B 31 Sets all subsequent line spacing at 7 72 in 10 3 lines per in ESC 1 8 inch ASCII ESC Control cTRL Decimal 27 48 Hexadecimal 1B 30 Sets all subsequent line spacing at 1 8 in 8 lines per in ESC A n 72 inch ASCII ESC A n Control cTRL A n Decimal 27 65 n Hexadecimal 1B 41 n Sets all subsequent line spacing at n 72 in The valid entries for n are 1 to 85 ESC A only sets the line spacing ESC 2 causes the specified line spacing to start Linefeeds LF sent before ESC 2 is spaced at the previously set line spacing ESC 2 Start Text Line Spacing ASCII ESC 2 Control CTRL 2 Decimal 27 50 Hexadecimal 1B 32 Begins text line spacing set by ESC A If ESC A has not been sent line spacing is 6 lines per in 236 IBM Proprinter Control Commands ESC 3 or ESC J n 216 inc
253. s the printer s changeable configuration settings A new printer is preset at the factory to e Emulate an Epson FX 100 printer on a parallel interface and e Print 6 lines per inch of 10 pitch 10 characters per inch draft quality characters on a form length of 11 in These factory settings specify how the printer reacts to data when you turn on the printer for the very first time These constitute the factory default settings or simply the factory defaults You can customize the defaults so that when you turn on the printer it reacts differently You might for example wish to change the default for Lines Inch so that the printer prints 8 lines per inch instead of 6 In the paragraph above it is important to stress the phrase when you turn on the printer In most cases the host computer sends commands to the printer at the beginning of each print job to alter or completely override the defaults Your defaults whether factory defaults or customized defaults only apply when you start up the printer and continuously print unformatted text files containing straight ASCII data 46 Configuration Formatted data files such as what MS Windows or WordPerfect or Lotus 1 2 3 or another modern software application would send to the printer contains control commands imbedded with the text to change many of the configuration settings to something other than the factory or customized defaults Typically a formatted data file
254. set to the next top margin FF Form Feed SCII FF Control CTRL L Decimal 12 Hexadecimal 0C Advances the paper to the top margin of the next page To advance the paper to the next top of form instead of the top margin the top margin setting must be cleared If Linefeed Newline mode is enabled the active column is returned to the left margin Operators Guide 299 ESC I n vv Select Pitch ASCII ESC I n w Control crR I n w Decimal 27 91 n 119 Hexadecimal 1B 5B n 77 Sets the number of characters printed per horizontal inch n specifies the pitch as follows Pitch 5 6 7 5 833 9 1 10 10 12 15 0 16 67 18 2 Value of n ASCI 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 1 8 Decimal 53 54 55 56 57 48 49 50 51 52 49 56 Hexadecimal35 36 37 38 39 30 31 32 33 34 31 38 10 pitch may also be selected using ESC w without sending parameter n Changing the pitch resets left and right margins to default settings ESC 29h Select Font Pitches ASCII ESC 2 9 h Control CTRL 2 9 h Decimal 27 91 63 50 57 104 Hexadecimal 1B 5B 3F 32 39 68 Sets pitch select mode to font pitches In this mode only certain character widths are printed If currently printing in 10 0 to 18 2 pitch only 10 characters per inch are printed If printing in 5 0 to 9 1 pitch only 5 characters per inch are printed 300 DEC LA210 Control Commands ESC 29lI Select All Pitches ASCII ESC 2 9 I Cont
255. setting selections available through the configuration menu Some configuration menu settings are more crucial to printer performance than others The printer drivers within a software application often change the printer s status to suit the document being printed that is the software temporarily changes the printer s configuration settings See Page 33 For example if EPSONFX is selected as the printer driver in MS Word 97 Word 97 might need to change the printer s default value of 10 pitch 10 character per in to 12 pitch to match your Word 97 character format requirements Because of the software s dominance over the printer s settings it is unnecessary to adjust every setting in the configuration menu unless you intend to print unformatted text such as Pine or Eudora e mail messages or BAT files Operators Guide 51 However because printer drivers do not or cannot change some printer settings such as the interface or emulation those settings are important to the printer s function These settings must be correctly set as default settings so they are in effect when the printer is turned on If your printer s configurations are set incorrectly for the interface the printer driver in the software application cannot change that setting and your documents will not be printed If your printer emulation setting does not match the emulation setting in the software your documents may not be printed or they may be printed inco
256. signals in relationship to DTE and DCE devices Operators Guide B 5 DTE DEVICE DCE DEVICE Frame Frame Ground Frame Frame Ground Ground Ground FG FG Transmitted Output Data signal Transmits Transmitted Input Data signal Receives Data TxD serial data on this pin Data TxD transmitted data on this pin Received Input Data signal Receives Received Output Data signal Data RxD serial data on this pin Data RxD Transmits serial data on this pin Request To Output Control signal DTE has Request To Input Control signal DCE Send data to send and is requesting Send looks for positive voltage on RTS permission to transmit by placing RTS this pin indicating other this pin high device has data to send Clear To Input Control signal DTE looks Clear To Output Control signal DCE Send for a positive voltage on this pin Send grants permission for other CTS as permission to transmit data CTS device to transmit data by placing positive voltage on this line Data Set Input Control signal from other Data Set Output Control signal DCE Ready RS 232 C device that lets DTE Ready places positive voltage on DSR know that the other RS 232 C DSR this pin when powered up device is powered up Signal Signal Ground Must be Signal Signal Ground Must be Ground connected Ground connected Data Input Control signal from other Data Output Control signal DCE Carrier RS 232 C device that lets DTE C
257. sing YES prints out the first of the forms options listed below e Lines Inch e Form Length e Skip Perf e LFon CR e CRonLF e Paper Jam Detect e Paper Speed 12 Configuration Lines Inch Pressing YES prints out the active line space setting e 6 Ipi factory default e 8 lpi This sets the number of lines per vertical inch For an 11 in form the printer prints a maximum of 66 lines at 6 Ipi or 88 at 8 Ipi Form Length Pressing YES prints out the active form length setting e 0 5 in to 31 5 in in 5 in increments 11 in is factory default e 11 3 in standard A4 length for continuous forms e 420 0mm e 297 0mm e 210mm e 148 5 mm Normally the form length is the vertical distance between horizontal perforations However any evenly divisible or multiple of this length to the half inch can be used For example if you print on fanfolded 1 7 in label stock you might want to set the form length to 1 7 in rather than the actual distance between horizontal perforations 12 in is a standard vertical distance between horizontal perforations on some fanfolded label stock Operators Guide 73 Skip Perf Pressing YES prints out e Off factory default e On Off The printer prints across the horizontal perforation unless instructed otherwise by the computer s software application This is the preferred setting in most instances In general leave it off if you print on label stock On The pr
258. ssing ON LINE FORM FEED and LINE FEED turn on printer to place printer in 17 14 pitch hex dump mode See Hex Dump Mode Page 132 To exit hex dump mode turn off the printer QI On Line Hot Keys The on line hot keys allow you to enter the configuration menu without having to turn off the printer to fine position the paper and to switch print quality modes For all on line hot keys you must press the ON LINE key hold that key depressed and then momentarily press the indicated switch panel key s Configuration Menu While ON BH pressing ON LINE LINE T FF LF momentarily press FORM nace E FEED and LINE FEED at the same time to print out the first configuration menu query See Configuration section Page 49 ON LINE EXIT ON LINE EXIT B YES J BACK Operators Guide 13 Move Up Paper Speed Exit While pressing ON LINE momentarily press LINE FEED to advance paper by one microline 144 in Use this for fine positioning the paper when setting top of form See Setting Top of Form Page 30 Also used for fast exiting the configuration menu Move Down Paper While pressing ON LINE momentarily press FORM FEED to back up paper by one microline 144 in Use this for fine positioning the paper when setting top of form See Setting Top of Form Page 30 When backing up paper pull down slightly on the paper 14 Basics NLQ Near Lette
259. ssing YES prints out the first of the Epson character options listed below e Epson Control Code Map e Epson Character Map e Epson IBM 1 e Epson IBM 2 An Epson FX 100 printer contains a basic or native character set plus two variations of IBM character sets Epson Epson IBM 1 and Epson IBM 18 Configuration 2 Although only one character set can be the default character set for the Epson emulation you can assign a national use character map or a code page default for each of the three Note Do not confuse the IBM 1 and IBM 2 character sets available in the Epson emulation with those of the IBM emulation The selections you make for the Epson emulation do not affect those of the IBM emulation and vice versa Epson Control Code Map Pressing YES prints out the present Epson control code map selection e Epson factory default e IBM 1 e IBM 2 Epson The U S Epson Character Set Epson control code map U S national use character map is shown on Page 39 Instead of the U S national use character map you can select one of 11 others under Epson Character Map Page 84 IBM 1 The U S IBM 1 Character Set IBM 1 control code map U S national use character map is shown on Page 41 Instead of the U S national use character map IBM calls this Code Page 437 you can select the multilingual or Portuguese character map under Epson IBM 1 Code Page Page 84 IBM 2 The U S IBM 2 Character Set is si
260. stitute the main character library When you select a character map in the configuration menu the printer chooses the characters from this built in ROM library of characters and lists the character numbers in the data byte map You can print the data byte map from the configuration menu Part of a sample data byte printout is shown on Page 63 Notice the a character in the data byte map The CHAR NUM for a is 097 which is assigned as DATA BYTE 097 from the character library on Page D 9 The hexadecimal character number equivalent to 097 decimal is 061h which is the character shown in the Standard ASCII Character Set Column 6 Row 1 on Page D 6 You can remap characters from the main character library into the active character set You might wish to do this if you need for example a registered mark 8 which is CHAR NUM 276 114h in place of the symbol in Column 2 Row 3 of the character set You would make such a substitution using a universal control command D 6 Appendix D Character Sets STANDARD ASCII CHARACTER SET 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ERE 2120 16 32 48 64 80 112 BEERERERERES 17 33 49 65 81 113 S 114 ELI EOT DC4 T 50 iis ENG U a s s 0 117 118 os 119 104 120 105 121 1 06 1 22 EOL jet n 11 21 43 59 15 91 107 123 12 28 60 76 108 124 IFES 13 29 61 77 109 125 Se eam a i z 14 30 62 78 110 126 pe e te Le e alm Mer 15 31 47 63 79 95 111 127
261. system that uses the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters A to F so that each digit can represent sixteen different values INTERFACE The physical and logical connection between two devices See PARALLEL INTERFACE and SERIAL INTERFACE LANGUAGE CHARACTER MAP Same as NATIONAL USE CHARACTER MAP LINE FEED A control key on the printer switch panel and a control code used to advance the paper one line MAPPING Process of assigning characters and control codes to data byte values NATIONAL USE CHARACTER MAP Character maps specific to different countries can be selected using the configuration menu NEAR LETTER QUALITY NLQ A method of printing used to increase the quality of printed characters This option is set using the configuration menu accessed from the printer switch panel or with a control command ON LINE When the printer is on line it is able to print data The printer is placed on line or off line by pressing the ON LINE key located on the printer switch panel Operators Guide G 5 PAGE The area of paper defined between horizontal perforations PARALLEL INTERFACE Physical and logical connection between devices where data are transmitted an entire character at a time PARITY The value of the parity bit in each character transmitted Parity checking ensures accurate data transmission PITCH A measure of the number of characters printed per horizontal inch of paper Pitch can be set using the configuration menu or w
262. t Press ON LINE If problem RAM CHECKSUM Match Previous Checksum persists call for service Setting Default Parameters Will occur if the carriage is impeded by an obstruction Used for dc cooling fan The printer returns to factory default setting This often happens when upgrading firmware Operators Guide 113 TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONTINUED Print Quality No Printout No Ribbon Cartridge or 1 Re install ribbon cartridge Cartridge Not Installed Page 100 Properly Ribbon Twisted Check ribbon Characters Too Light Printhead Gap Too Wide 1 Adjust printhead gap Page Ribbon Worn Out 27 Replace ribbon Page 100 Fading Print Worn Out Ribbon 1 Replace ribbon Page 100 Ribbon Not Advancing Re install or replace ribbon or Motor or Electronics Page 100 If problem Failure persists call for service Characters are OK Then Electronics Failure Call for service Begin to Break Up Carriage May Hit Bumper Smudging Printheads Too Close to Re adjust printhead gap Page Paper 27 Worn Ribbon and or Examine If necessary Ribbon Guides replace ribbon cartridge Page Printhead Blend Needs 100 Adjusting Call for service Bottom Half of Forms Compressor Not On Check that forms compressor is Characters Missing Alignment Tabs properly positioned over right and left alignment tabs 114 Troubleshooting TROUBLESHOOTING CHART CONTINUED Print Quality continued
263. ta for NLQ characters Downloaded NLQ characters may be printed only when NLQ printing is selected When draft printing is selected the printer prints random dots To design characters that are between draft and NLQ print quality place dots within any of the cells Ten columns of character data are sent to the printer When NLQ printing is selected the printer adds dots to the design of the character When draft printing is selected the printer omits some dots from adjacent columns See the illustrations below 4 e Pu af m I Fl 1234258782310 12345676310 1 3 a B Mis 1 5 T 8 5 10 amp i oe Ej i 5 l al Faj e Dols in design of cFaracie C Dols printer adds for Dols printer om ls for carrespardence quality near letter quality printing draft printing Print Quality NLQ Draft Characters Calculated from Correspondence Quality Download Character aso u1 158 Universal Control Commands To design NLQ characters place dots within any of the design matrix cells Forty columns of character data are sent to the printer twenty for each print pass In the second print pass the dots are offset vertically by one half dot e Dots printed in first print pass Dots printed in second print pass Dots offset 1 2 dot vertically 2 4 6 8 10 1214 16 18 20 222
264. ted in Step 1 faces out through the window of the fuse compartment 8 Close the compartment H Z Opening Fuse Compartment Changing Fuses DAO E DAO F Operators Guide 103 VERTICAL IMAGE ALIGNMENT The configuration menu provides a simple means of making slight compensations in the factory s vertical alignment setting The printer is a bidirectional printer meaning it prints text not only on left to right passes of the printhead carriage but also on right to left passes Vertical alignment simply adjusts the relative timing between bidirectional passes so that consecutive lines line up vertically Vertical alignment only affects draft text if Bi Directional Graphics NLQ in the configuration menu is off If off graphics NLQ text and text printed as graphics such as TrueType text are printed only on left to right passes of the printhead carriage To check or change vertical alignment proceed as follows 1 For a wide carriage printer make sure that wide 14 7 s in paper is installed in the printer 2 Enter the configuration menu If the printer is off press FORM FEED while turning on the printer Ae gage E IK VU FF T eme BACK 104 Maintenance If the printer is on press and hold ON LINE while simultaneously pressing FORM FEED and LINE FEED E a LINE FF LF EXIT BACK YES 3 If necessary check and or change the Char Inch setting und
265. ter end of the cable Operators Guide B 9 PRINTER DCE DEVICE Pin Signal Cable Signal Pin FG KS FG 2 gt TxD TxD gt 3 lt RxD RxD lt 4 gt RIS RIS gt 9 SS CS SHK eS SS CIS lt 6 lt DSR DSR lt 7 SG SG 8 lt DCD DCD lt 20 gt DTR DR gt Printer To DCE Device Wiring Diagram ABO AM PRINTER DIE DEVICE Pin Signal Cable Signal Pin 1 FG FG 2v ccce D sec 3 lt RxD RD gt 4 gt RTS RIS lt 5 C CIS gt 6 lt DSR DSR gt 7 SG SG 8 lt DCD N DCD gt 20 gt DTR eS DTR lt Printer To DTE Device Wiring Diagram ABO AN To determine which wiring diagram to use you must determine if the device is DTE or DCE Locate a description of the target device s Transmitted Data signal and determine if it is an input or output If Transmitted Data is an output the device is DTE Use the DTE wiring diagram If Transmitted Data is an input the device is DCE Use the DCE wiring diagram B 10 Appendix B Serial Interface To determine the pin assignments of other devices refer to those devices technical reference manuals The serial interface pin assignments functional description signal direction and control requirements are
266. ter set easier and more standardized between printers One or more character maps can be assigned to make up the completed character set An example of a standard character map is the 96 character ASCII map The standard ASCII character set with control and character code assignments is shown on Pages D 6 and D 7 Most character and control code mappings are variations of this standard character set for a 7 bit code The ASCII character set covers the standard American computer keyboard American Standard Code for Information Interchange Operator s Guide D 3 Note Notice that the right and left halves of the ASCII character set are identical That is because the ASCII set was created for a 7 bit data byte 0000000 to 1111111 in the binary numbering system or 0 to127 in decimal or 00 to 7F in hexadecimal back in the days of the teletypewriter Because computers and printers now commonly use an 8 bit data byte 00000000 11111111 binary 0 255 decimal or 00 FF hexadecimal the ASCII character and control codes are repeated on the upper half of the character set to cover the possibilities of the 8th bit being either a binary 0 or a binary 1 The printer contains literally hundreds of standard character and control code map combinations You can also modify the standard character set using one or more overlays An overlay can be used to map over some or all of the character and control possibilities with other characters from ROM or RAM c
267. the Lines An Introduction to Barcode Technology by Craig K Harmon and Russ Adams published 1984 by Helmers Publishing Inc 174 Concord St Peterborough NH 03458 Specifications for UPC and EAN barcodes can be found in the UPC Symbol Specifications Manual available from the Uniform Code Council Inc P O Box 1244 Dayton OH 45401 513 435 3870 USPS PostNet Zip 4 Delivery Point specification for PostNet can be found in Postal Service Specification DMM Sections 324 72 through 324 77 E 2 Appendix E Barcodes PRINTING BARCODES To print barcode symbols proceed as follows 1 Send the printer a Barcode Format command This command specifies characteristics of the barcode symbol for example bar height and width If this step is not performed the default parameters are used For example in BASIC send LPRINT CHR 1 AzM CHR 0 CHR 0 CHR 1 LPRINT CHR 1 CHR 3 CHR 1 CHR 3 CHR 1 to set up parameters for Example 1 on Page E 21 Send the printer the Start Barcode command This command tells the printer to print all subsequent data in the form of a barcode symbol Send LPRINT CHR 1 AzL1 to begin interpreting and printing barcode patterns Send the printer the barcode data The data is printed in the form of a barcode symbol For example send LPRINT 1988 1988 CHR 13 LPRINT 123456789123456789 CHR 13 to print the patterns shown in Example 1 Operators Guid
268. those of the computer e Check that Pin 3 RxD on the printer is connected to TxD on the computer Pin 2 on a PC Pin 3 on a PC AT If true connect DTR Pin 20 on the PC to DCD Pin 8 on the PC to initiate transmission Operator s Guide B 19 INTERFACE CIRCUITS 12v us 18K N MC1l489 lt uu Nw Ol NE 100pF 100pF Data Line Receiver 5v 1IMC1489 y Ol NL 100pF 1 pF Control Line Receiver 12v MC1488 B No zi 12v 100pF Line Driver Version 1 JBO BP1 B 20 Appendix B Serial Interface Transceiver MAX213 MC1489 s Of e V T SK 100pF J Line Receiver 3 V T5v 400K MC1488 lt N e Jo e ma 100pF Line Driver i ZZ Equivalent Circuits Version 2 JDO DS Appendix C Parallel Interface This appendix deals with Centronics type parallel interface connectivity PARALLEL INTERFACE BASICS The parallel interface is Centronics compatible It receives parallel data through an 8 bit input only port which is located on the rear panel of the printer The connector is a 36 pin female Kycon 37 40360 24 BR or equivalent Parallel Port Connector JBO BK C 2 X Appendix C Parallel Interface DATA The host computer sends each data byte to the printer in parallel across Data Lines 1 through 8 connector Pins 2 through 9 A bit set to logical 1 is transmitte
269. to Lower Data Bytes default ASCII SI Control CTRL O Decimal 15 Hexadecimal OF Maps the GO character map selected with control command ESC into the lower data bytes making that character map active for printing SO Map G1 into Lower Data Bytes ASCII SO Control CTRLN Decimal 14 Hexadecimal OE Maps the G1 character map selected with control command ESC into the lower data bytes making that character map active for printing ESCn Map G2 into Lower Data Bytes ASCII ESC n Control CTRL Decimal 27 110 Hexadecimal 1B 6E Maps the G2 character map selected with control command ESC into the lower data bytes making that character map active for printing To print only one character from the character map designated as G2 use control command ESC N Operators Guide 275 ESC o Map G3 into Lower Data Bytes ASCII ESC o Control CTRL o Decimal 111 Hexadecimal 6F Maps the G3 character map selected with control command ESC into the lower data bytes making that character map active for printing To print only one character from the character map selected as G3 use ESC O ESC Map G1 into Upper Data Bytes ASCII ESC m Control CTRL 5 Decimal 27 126 Hexadecimal 1B 7E Maps the G1 character map selected with control command ESC into the upper data bytes making that character map active for printing ESC Map G2 into Up
270. top of form If Auto Carriage Return CR on LF is enabled a carriage return is performed after the form feed Otherwise printing continues in the next column to the right This control code cancels control code SO Operators Guide 201 DEL Delete Last Character ASCII DEL Control not applicable Decimal 127 Hexadecimal 7F Deletes the last character in the print buffer CAN Cancel Data in Print Buffer ASCII CAN Control CTRL X Decimal 24 Hexadecimal 18 Cancels all data currently in the print buffer The right margin becomes the current print position ESC s Half Speed Printing ASCII ESC s n Control CTRL s n Decimal 27 115 n Hexadecimal 1B 73 n Starts or cancels half speed printing Half speed printing causes the printer to run at 50 percent of the normal speed Itis an effective way to reduce print noise and improve horizontal alignment n specifies whether it is set or cancelled as follows n 1 or 49 Start half speed printing n 0 or 48 Cancel half speed printing The printer uses half speed printing when the operator access door is open 202 Epson FX 100 Control Commands Example REM START HALF SPEED PRINTING LPRINT CHR 27 s CHR 1 LPRINT This is a test REM CANCEL HALF SPEED PRINTING LPRINT CHR 27 s CHR 0 LPRINT This is a test DC1 Select Printer ASCII DC1 Control CTRL Q Decimal 17 Hexadecimal 11
271. tor 9 Pin Graphics Mode Re assign 8 Pin Graphics Copy ROM to RAM Proportional Space Mode Some of the functions listed above can be performed with Universal Control Commands as follows Epson Control Equivalent Universal Control Sequence Command ESC User Defined Character SOH A z Select Character Source Library Set ESC Copy ROM to RAM Function not required to map or download characters ESC amp Define User Defined SOH Az amp Download Character Characters Operators Guide 183 CHARACTER SETS ESCR National Use Character Maps ASCII ESC R n Control cTRL R n Decimal 27 82 n Hexadecimal 1B 52 n Selects a national use character map The selected character map remains in effect until this control command is sent to the printer again n specifies the national use character map as follows n Character Map n Character Map 0 United States 8 Japan 1 Japan 9 Norway 2 Germany 10 Denmark II 3 United Kingdom 11 Spain II 4 Denmark 12 Latin America 5 Sweden 128 Hebrew 6 Italy Epson 129 Italy ANSI 7 Spain I See Appendix D for charts showing the national use character maps This command applies only to the Epson Character Set If an IBM Character Set is currently in use ESC R does not take effect until the Epson Character Set is selected from the configuration menu Example REM SELECT THE GERMAN CHARACTER MAP LPRINT CHR 27 R CHR 2 184 Epson FX 100 Contr
272. ubstitutions for DEC National Use Character Map D 41 The Character SO uice eod erben heo erheben erint D 42 Epson Enhanced Character Sets ssss D 42 IBM All Character Character Set ssuusse D 43 IBM 2 Multilingual Character Set D 44 Epson ESC Printable Character Overlay D 46 Epson ESC 6 Printable Character Expansion Overlay D 48 Epson Standard Code Page Character Set D 50 IBM All Character Overlay seeeeseeeeeeess D 52 IBM 2 All Character Multilingual Character Set D 54 Operators Guide xxi Appendix E Barcodes Printing Barcodes cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas E 2 Barcode Format Command seen E 4 Pd TOURS e no io ai cia um E 5 Barcode Format Command Example E 9 Start Barcode GOMMAN Qa aaaaaaaa aaa aa anne nene esse even even e nenen enet E 9 Barcode Dates MERCEDE E 10 Valid Character S pensionin kret E 11 Entering Barcode Data c setenta ote te qeu durer UAR E 12 QUI ZON pidh th E 13 PAG S LM eset ttl uM D tem E 13 PostNet Placement on an Envelope E 16 Check DIS d ettet dedidit S ME EU E E 17 Number System Characters and Country Flags E 18 Start Characters Stop Characters
273. uration menu if you select the IBM 2 control code map Page D 13 and the IBM Multilingual Code Page 850 Page D 26 you would have the character set shown on Pages D 40 and D 41 To print out a copy of your active character set see Page 34 See Page 37 through 39 for printouts of factory default character sets EPSON ENHANCED CHARACTER SETS Two Epson character map overlays can be used to map over some of the characters in the active Epson character set These Epson character overlays Pages D 42 and D 44 are chosen using control commands e ESCI 1 overlays portions of Columns 0 1 8 and 9 of the active Epson character set with printable characters Use ESC I to remove the overlay e ESC 6 overlays portions of Columns 8 and 9 of the active Epson character set with printable characters Use ESC 7 to remove the overlay Use ESC I 1 together with ESC 6 to create the Epson National Use Standard Code Page Character Set shown on Pages D 46 and D 47 Operator s Guide D 39 IBM ALL CHARACTER CHARACTER SET IBM emulation has a standard character set called the all character character set The all character character set consists of the active character set and a temporary overlay Pages D 48 and D 49 The overlay temporarily maps over the control codes in Columns 0 and 1 Pages D 50 and D 51 show the temporary all character overlay used with the IBM 2 Multilingual Character Set The IBM control command to temp
274. urce is RAM A character library is a defined group of printable characters stored in the printer This map shows which library is currently active for each data byte value between 0 and 255 Each character in a character library is numbered The character number map specifies which characters are currently selected for each data byte value between 0 and 255 148 Universal Control Commands The 4100 printer emulates several printers each of which has defined standard character sets control code maps and national use character maps Examples are Epson German ESC 6 and IBM 2 Code Page 437 Selecting these standard options can be done using the configuration menu or control commands described in other sections Selecting these options modifies the data byte map as illustrated below Data Byte Map Character Maps A y Charactel Qo Standard character set selected Character A N no other modifications Character Standard character set selected control code map modified Standard character set selected L character map modified 7 Standard character set selected Code Page modified Standard character set selected Overlay characters selected Control Code Standard Control Character Code Overlay Character Code Maps Pages Characters Sets Maps Modifying the Data Byte Map Standard Character Options ABO N1 The data byte map is also updated each time
275. usly from the G2 character map use control sequence ESC n or 1 To print the upper data byte characters the 8 Bit DEC option must be set in the configuration menu If the 7 Bit DEC option is set these commands are stored in memory but not invoked until 8 Bit DEC is selected Operators Guide 277 ESC to map G2 into the lower or upper data bytes respectively making that character map active for printing ESC O or SS3 Print Next Character from G3 ASCII ESC O n Control cTRL O n Decimal 27 79 n Hexadecimal 1B 4F n ASCII SS3 n Control not applicable Decimal 143 n Hexadecimal 8F n Prints the next character from the G3 character map selected with control sequence ESC n specifies the character to print The value of n must be from 0 to 127 G3 does not need to be currently active that is mapped into the lower or upper data bytes to use this command Both commands perform the same function SS3 is valid only if 8 Bit DEC has been set in the configuration menu and if the C1 control codes have been enabled using ESC SP 7 This command is valid for printing one character only To print continuously from the G3 character map use control code ESC o or ESC to map G3 into the lower or upper data bytes respectively making that character map active for printing The following prints the character from the U K character set Example LPRINT CHR 27 A LPRINT CHR 27 O L
276. value of all characters received by the printer and where possible also prints the character itself in the right hand column See the example Unprintable characters are represented as a period To exit the hex dump mode turn off printer The printer is a high volume hi 4 73 20 46 OF 72 6D 28 78 72 89 6E 74 65 gh speed continuous fora printe 4 69 63 61 6C 20 61 78 78 OC 69 53 61 74 r for business critical applicat 78 61 74 65 4E 74 65 64 28 54 72 69 4D 6i ions Its unique patented Trine AF AC 69 64 28 78 65 trix technology assures solid pe 9 28 SF 75 74 78 75 Tforsance and high quality outpu 28 33 18 38 28 4C t The printer delivers 388 1 7 73 64 65 20 63 61 72 72 ines per minute in the wide carr amp E 28 74 68 65 2B amp E iage model and 488 lpa in the n Hex Dump Mode Printout Example JBO AL Control Commands An Introduction This section explains the following e Communication basics e Sending control codes and control commands e identifying data bytes e Typographic conventions COMMUNICATION BASICS Communication between the computer and printer is accomplished by exchanging codes that have a predefined meaning The building blocks of these codes are bits and bytes Bits are the fundamental element of computer communication and may have one of two values zero and one Computers and printers recognize only these two states zero and one A byte or data byte is a group of 8 bits that have sign
277. ven Odd Mark Space or None 10r2 See Appendix B for details A 10 Appendix A Specifications CHARACTERISTICS CONTINUED Parallel Interface Centronics Selectable initialize sensitivity Compatible Memory Configuration 32K x 8 for download characters and input buffer 128K x 8 firmware SAFETY FEATURES Your printer has the following safety features e Printer prints at half soeed when printing 10 pitch if the operator access door is open e All electrically conductive materials are grounded See Appendix C for details RELIABILITY Printhead Life Expectancy Mean Time Between Failures MTBF Mean Time to Repair MTTR PHYSICAL Height Width Depth Weight out of box Shipping Weight Acoustic Level ISO 7779 Operator s Guide A 11 500 million characters per printhead 9000 power on hr at 15 duty cycle and 32 print density per page 5 hr 6 02 in 153 mm without acoustic hood 27 38 in 695 5 mm 16 7 in 424 mm without acoustic hood 45 Ib 20 5 kg max 52 Ib 23 6 kg max 65 dBA max without acoustic hood and stand 55 dBA max with acoustic hood and stand 0 dBA in standby mode power on but not printing A 12 Appendix A Specifications REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL Voltage Frequency Power Consumption Leakage Current 110 120 220 or 240 vac 50 60Hz 3Hz Standby less than 30 w Printing 200 w max printing rolling ASCII ch
278. wer computer Input Buffer Size Pressing YES prints out the present setting e Maximum no user defined characters factory default e Minimum user defined characters OK The printer contains a 32K RAM part of which is available as an input buffer The input buffer is used for storing print data graphics and user defined characters If you download and retain user defined characters you decrease the amount of memory available for input print data Maximum no user defined characters All of the input buffer is reserved for input print data User defined downloaded custom characters are rejected Minimum user defined characters OK The minimum amount of space assigned to the input buffer for print data is reduced to 532 bytes The rest is used to accommodate custom characters downloaded from the Maximizing the input buffer size does not affect the use of graphic fonts such as TrueType fonts The restriction only applies to custom characters downloaded using universal control commands 66 Configuration computer using universal control commands You can then specify up to 128 custom characters Even if you do not intend to download custom characters minimizing the input buffer to 532 bytes has some side effect advantages Consider minimizing the buffer size to minimize e Data loss due to possible power network or computer failures e Dedicated computer to printer transmission time Note Storing downloaded ch
279. with a null byte m denotes the tab channel The valid entries for m are Oto 7 n denotes the line number for each tab The valid entries for n are from 2 to the bottom line on the page as specified by the form length setting Send the values of n in ascending order An out of order tab value is interpreted as a terminator Note The tab positions for Channel 0 can also be set with ESC B Operators Guide 219 ESC B and ESC b clear all existing vertical tabs Therefore to add one tab you must include all existing tabs plus the new one Use ESC B or ESC b to set the tabs Use the Vertical Tab control code VT to cause the printer to tab to each subsequent tab ESC Select Vertical Tab Channel ASCII ESC n Control cTRL 1 n Decimal 27 47 n Hexadecimal 1B 2F n Selects one of eight vertical tab channels as active All subsequent VT commands use the channel selected by this command Valid entries for n are 0 to 7 The default value is 0 220 Epson FX 100 Control Commands IBM Proprinter Control Commands This section describes the control codes and control commands you can use while the printer is in IBM Proprinter XL emulation mode Before using these commands read the section entitled Control Commands An Introduction It describes the typographic conventions used in this section and other information needed to send these commands in the correct format 222 IBM Proprinter Control Comman
280. xist between the DEC LA210 emulation in the 4100 printer and the DEC LA210 printer as described in the following subsections UNSUPPORTED DEC COMMANDS The following DEC LA210 commands are not available in this DEC LA210 emulation ESC SP G Enable 8 bit Transmission ESC SP F Disable 8 bit Transmission ESC n A Initiate n Reverse Linefeeds ESCm Reverse Linefeed ESC Select Alternate Character Sets see Note ESC Select Alternate Character Sets see Note ESC Select Alternate Character Sets see Note ESCI Select Alternate Character Sets see Note ESC 160c Font Configuration Report ESCZ Printer ID ESC Application Program Command ESC Operating System Command ESC Privacy Message RI Reverse Index ESCL Partial Line Up PLU Partial Line Up OSC Operating System Command PM Privacy Message APC Application Program Command ESC 1 m through ESC 14m Specify Character Fonts Note All character sets can be selected with other commands 266 DECLA210 Control Commands In addition to the DEC LA210 functions listed on the previous page commands that are supported by the DEC LA210 yet perform no function on the DEC LA210 printer and are not supported in DEC LA210 emulation on the 4100 printer are listed below EOT DLE DC2 DC4 NAK SYN ETB EM SUB FS GS RS US DEL End of Transmission Data Link Escape Device Control 2 Device Control 4 Negative Acknowledge Synchronous ldle End of Transmissio
281. y Characters A character set contains assignment for up to 256 character and control codes Each emulation offers at least two character set variations along with other variations based on the language and or country Operators Guide 77 Each emulation has a default character set The factory default character sets for the 4100 printer are English language U S A The factory default U S Epson IBM and DEC character sets are illustrated on Pages 39 through 43 If desired you may map over the U S English characters with French Swedish U K English Multilingual characters and so on depending on the emulation Note The factory default emulation is Epson FX 100 therefore the character set in effect when you turn on the printer for the first time is the U S Epson Character Set If you then switch for example to the IBM Proprinter XL emulation as your default emulation then the U S IBM 1 Character Set is in effect when the printer is turned on Besides the character options available within an emulation you can also overlay parts of the active language biased character set with optical character recognition OCR characters You can even overlay particular character set characters with your own characters downloaded from the computer using universal control commands To check out the active character and control code assignments use the Print Active Character Set menu selection Page 36 Epson Character Options Pre
282. y for graphics Eight bits also allows access to all of the character and control data bytes 0 255 in the character sets 64 Configuration 7 Bits Limits the printer s ability to handle graphics and restricts it to accessing only the lower character and control data bytes 0 127 in the character sets Parity Pressing YES prints out the present parity bit status e None factory default e Even e Odd e Mark e Space The parity bit follows the data byte transmitted from the computer to the printer The printer can use even or odd parity to check that all data bits from the computer were received correctly None No parity check Even Data bits are either binary 0 or binary 1 For even parity all of the data bits must add up to an even decimal sum If not the parity bit is set to binary 1 to make it so Odd All of the data bits must add up to an odd decimal sum If not the parity bit is set to binary 1 to make it so Mark Parity bit is always binary 1 Space Parity bit is always binary 0 Operators Guide 65 Stop Bits Pressing YES prints out the present stop bit status e 1 Bit factory default e 2Bits The printer uses the stop bit s to detect the space in between data bytes The stop bit follows the parity bit if parity is enabled 1 Bit One bit is sufficient for the printer and most modern computers 2 Bits Consider using two stop bits if you transmit at a relatively high baud using an older slo

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

KeepOut R1  Uso del computer  Mexique 24 09 09  ・本説明書はりー ~ZEPHYR400(ZR4000) に対応する内容で言己載致し  SECULIFE ESPRO - GMC  Einbau - und Betriebsanleitung  AKIYAMA ASIO DRIVER  Kensington K38085NA  ロット認証申請書記載例(PDF版)  Decisión 2005/343/CE, de 11 de abril, por la que se establecen los  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file